JP2015104559A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing reduction of game interest by alleviating the mental feeling of dislike due to an opportunity in which a game player is made to see a screen where a profit imparting state is finished.SOLUTION: A slot machine of the present invention moves to be in an ART game state when an ART transfer lottery is won during a general state, BB, and RB. When the ART game state is started, an initial game number determination game is performed. When power is interrupted at the time of execution of the initial game number determination game, an image different from the image when power is interrupted is displayed on an image display unit.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning cylinder gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, as a pachislot machine, there is a game machine that adds an AT or ART game number as an advantageous game state. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine provided with a so-called additional special zone in which the additional rate of these games is increased during AT or ART (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In this gaming machine, when the added special zone ends, an end screen indicating the end of the added special zone is displayed on the display device.

JP 2012-143436 A

  In the gaming machine disclosed in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, the additional specialization zone is one in which the additional ratio of the number of AT or ART games is increased, and the transition is desired by the player, but the end is the game It is not desirable for the person. For this reason, the player does not want much to see the state end screen to which the benefit such as the added special zone is given.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in interest by reducing the disgust due to the opportunity to see a screen where the state where the profit is granted ends. is there.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention for solving the above-described problems executes a lottery for winning combination to rotate a plurality of movable bodies, stops the plurality of rotating movable bodies, and displays a result of the lottery. A profit granting state control means for controlling a profit granting state in which a profit is given to a player, and when the profit granting state is controlled by the profit granting state control means. When the game progress interruption situation where the display by the end display means is interrupted and when the game progress interruption situation occurs, the display by the end display means is displayed. When the profit progress state end information is displayed by the end information recovery display means for resuming the game, and when the game progress interruption situation occurs and the game progress interruption situation is resolved, the end information A buffer display means that can relieve the feeling of loneliness due to the end of the profit granting state by displaying information outside the profit granting state end information different from the profit granting state end information by the reverse display means and restarting the display by the end display means; It is characterized by providing.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the disgust by reducing the aversion caused by the opportunity to see the screen where the state where the profit is granted ends.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door-shaped front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part in FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of Fig.8 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is a disassembled perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the symbol variation display apparatus which shows the other form of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relationship between a case member and the stopper of the outer main body side. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a design variation display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lower half portion of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is the rear view which looked at the heat radiation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-section partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. It is a principal part sectional drawing of the side plate of an outer main part, and a power supply device which shows another form. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which decomposes | disassembles and shows a transparent plate. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate. It is a disassembled / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain | linkage of a hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool to the vertical direction. It is a principal part crossing top view of the door-shaped front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and the frame member in the model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door-shaped front member, connecting a connector. FIG. 3 is a development view in which a symbol array of a reel band is developed in a plane. It is an enlarged view of the symbol display window 401 part. It is the schematic which shows roughly the structure of the various mechanism elements with which the slot machine is equipped, an electronic device, an operation member, etc. It is a figure which shows the winning probability about each winning combination. It is a figure which shows each winning combination and the condition apparatus established corresponding to each winning combination. It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, and the number of payout of medals. It is a figure which continues from FIG. 51, and is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, and the number of payout of medals. It is a figure which continues from FIG. 52, and is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, and the number of payout of medals. It is a flowchart which shows the basic 1 game processing procedure in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer control process. It is an ART shift determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a reel stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a BB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a BB game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a RB game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of RB game completion | finish determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of RT game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of RT game completion | finish determination processing. It is a figure which shows the progress condition of chance RT. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. It is a figure which shows the progress condition when a pushing order mistake arises by chance RT. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. It is a figure which shows the progress situation of other chance RT. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a progress situation following FIG. 72. (A) is a low probability stay state transition lottery table, and (b) is a high probability stay state transition lottery table. (A) is a chance RT transition lottery table during a low probability stay, and (b) is a chance RT transition lottery table during a high probability stay. It is a figure which shows the advancing condition of output conversion control. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. It is a figure which shows the winning combination lottery table at the time of three sheets. It is a figure which shows the winning combination lottery table at the time of 1 sheet. It is a figure which shows a pseudo | simulation bonus lottery table. It is a front view of the slot machine showing a bonus symbol combination. It is a front view of the slot machine showing a pseudo bonus symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the progress of the game state until it is during a bonus. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. It is a figure which shows the progress condition of the game state to a pseudo | simulation bonus. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. It is a figure which shows a symbol conversion table. It is a figure which shows the progress situation of symbol conversion control. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. It is a figure which shows the progress condition following FIG. It is a perspective view of the slot machine of other forms. It is the expanded view which expand | deployed the symbol row | line of the reel band of another form planarly. It is a figure which shows the winning combination lottery table at the time of three sheets. It is a figure which shows the winning combination lottery table at the time of 1 sheet. It is a figure which shows an ART transfer lottery table. (A) is a figure showing a small role probability change continuation game number lottery table, (b) is a figure showing a small role probability change conversion magnification lottery table, and (c) is a figure showing a small role probability change conversion number lottery table. It is. (A) is a figure which shows the continuation probability determination table at the time of initial game number determination, (b) is a figure which shows the number-of-presses determination table at the time of initial game number determination, (c) is a unit addition game number at the time of initial game number determination. It is a figure which shows a determination table. (A) is a figure which shows an ART interruption end cherry number determination table, (b) is a figure which shows an ART interruption end cherry conversion probability determination table. It is a front view of the slot machine which shows the bonus symbol combination of BB. It is a front view of the slot machine which shows the bonus symbol combination of RB. It is a front view of the slot machine showing a state at the time of ART transfer. (A) is a figure which shows the state which starts the initial game number determination game of an ART game, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state following FIG. 103, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state following FIG. 104, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the other state following FIG. 103, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state following FIG. 106, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state following FIG. 107, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). It is a figure which shows the state following FIG. (A) is a figure which wins during RB and navigates the bonus symbol combination, (b) is a figure which displays the bonus symbol combination of RB continuously. (A) is a figure which shows progress in RB following FIG. 110, (b) is a figure which shows the state which won the ART transfer lottery. (A) is a figure which shows the state following FIG. 111, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state following FIG. 112, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state which navigates a star-aligned replay, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state following FIG. 114, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). The figure which shows the state which won the star-like misreplay, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state following FIG. 116, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state which starts an ART interruption game, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the state following FIG. 118, (b) is a figure which shows the state following (a). (A) is a figure which shows the return image displayed when it returns after a power failure etc., (b) is a figure which shows the state by which the initial game number determination game was restarted after that. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the display mode of the unit addition game number in an initial game number determination game.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is a door-shaped front member omitted. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing the state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show a temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view in which the cover of the wiring relay member is omitted, and FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are cross-sectional views of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, and FIG. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer main body side, and FIG. 24 is the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display apparatus. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 is the back of the slot machine FIG. 29 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply device viewed from below, and FIG. 31 shows another embodiment. FIG. 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a lighting device showing another form, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing an exploded transparent plate and a light-emitting unit, 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate, FIG. 35 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member fitted with the transparent plate, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge bracket. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, and FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. 40 is a perspective view seen from the back side showing the upper half of the door-shaped front member, and FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing an example of another hinge fitting, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the coupler is connected.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 of the present invention can be rotated in the shape of a side-opening door with a box-shaped outer body 100 whose front surface is open and a rotating shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer body 100. A door-shaped front member 200 attached to the housing, a symbol variation display device 300 that varies a plurality of symbols by a driving means, a case member 400 that is detachable from the outer body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface, and an optional And an image display 500 that displays the image of the above.

[Outside body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer body 100 has side plates 102 and 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102 and 102. It has a letter-shaped frame shape and is formed in a box shape in which only the front surface is opened by fixing a back plate 104 to the back of the frame. The left and right side plates 102, 102 are trapezoids whose front edges are slightly inclined in a rearwardly inclined state, and therefore the opening of the outer body 100 has an inclination in the rearwardly inclined state. In addition, the top plate 103 has a plurality (in the embodiment, 4 in the embodiment) in a region facing the upper pier 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the gaming machine installation island in a state of being installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). Through holes 132, 132... Are formed.

[Outer body-divider]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf-like partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a protruding portion 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends are attached to the outer body 100. The side plate 102 is fixed to the inner surface of the side plate 102, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a cylindrical projection (not shown) by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and positioned. In addition, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in the innermost part on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal releasing device 110 that releases a medal as a game medium to a medal tray 201 at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200, and the medal releasing device 110 A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Medal discharge device]
The medal releasing device 110 is obtained by attaching a medal storage hopper 110b to a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow rod 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the protruding end of the overflow rod 110d. The medal releasing mechanism of the medal releasing device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion in which three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 and the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. Yes. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal discharge device 110 and is likely to generate heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. A mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find an unauthorized work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an interior of the slot machine 1. It is formed by a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a that faces the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided below the guard portion 102b. It is a specification that sneaks one side. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is blocked by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a slightly protrudes toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard portion 102b is formed. It fits into the groove.

  Thus, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is covered with the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a is moved into the device case 112a. The substrate 112s or the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach a cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s or the like is assembled into the apparatus case 112a.

  The upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a are formed with a large number of air holes 112g, 112g. . The device case 112a is lifted in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise and relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiating port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air at the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If the inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a are formed. Even if there is a deviation in the height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes an attachment piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 112 m and the heat radiating port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 are fixed to the outer main body 100.

  That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiating port 104a. The protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is in a position inscribed in the heat radiating port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the radiating port 104a to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It consists of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiating port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat radiating port 104a. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted with respect to directions other than the direction of pulling forward by a simple operation of only fitting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of screw through holes 112p are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and are fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q in at least one of the through holes 112p. Thus, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction of pulling forward, the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a and the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion. However, at this position, there is a high risk that the power cord is bundled with the ground. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and a power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for the case. Therefore, the slot machine 1 is moved on the manufacturing line or between lines. When moving the power cord, the power cord may slip on the ground or get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment expands the cord outlet 104b from the upper side toward the upper side, and draws the power cord from there. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, since the power supply device 112 is set at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and only one wood screw 112q is screwed in, the mounting is completed. Great labor saving in installation work. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw with respect to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112. In particular, a screw fixed to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize and may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra process and cost hardly occur. On the contrary, the cooling efficiency is improved because the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally formed, so that it costs little. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112 can be implemented with almost no cost.

[Outer body-Partition plate-Upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as the core of the wiring means described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. The back plate 104 is further provided with a vent hole 133 for heat dissipation above the wiring relay member 113.

[Door type front member]
3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side on the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided in the approximate center on the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203, and a one-sheet insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX insertion button 206 for instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and a medal return for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 to be described later to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (release command by settlement) of medal stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300 And three reel stops for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. Button 211a, 211b, 211c and the like are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Note that the three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c correspond to the movable body described in the solving means.

  In addition, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, and a medal basket 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return basket 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a well-known one that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown), and when the game state is waiting for the player to insert a medal, the flow path is set to the medal tub 212 side. In addition, in a gaming state in which medals are refused to be inserted, such as medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return basket 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position where the door-shaped front member 200 covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the tip of the medal basket 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medal that flows through the medal bowl 212 through the hop-off reaches the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return basket 213 is connected to the front-side medal tray 201, and the medal that flows from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return basket 213 returns to the medal tray 201.

[Door-shaped front member-see-through window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300 can be seen side by side, and the image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The regions of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided vertically. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[Door-shaped front member-transparent window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a uses a transparent synthetic resin (for example, methacrylic resin containing rubber excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used. ) In a generally inverted trapezoidal shape, and an edge member 214b that bulges to the front side of the three sides (left and right sides and upper side) excluding the bottom, with the side facing the player as the front 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a mold for resin molding. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion hardly occur.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b is a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid, but a shell-like structure with a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, for example, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or characters on the surface are incorporated in the internal space as necessary.

  In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on any one side at a minimum.

  In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 34, reference numeral 218 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a. The screw is passed through the through hole 214c (see FIG. 33 enlarged view) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 functions as a corner decoration on the appearance, and on the through holes 200a and 214d (see an enlarged view of FIG. 33) provided at the corner portions on the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby serving as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitter 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the left and right is set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitter 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitter 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitter 217a (a combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) upward of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above-described structure can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit is made, and can produce an effect that appeals to the surroundings of the occurrence of the big win. In this way, by performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won a big hit, and the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further increases the game. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot is coming out.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the bottom of the plate-shaped front member 200 is formed with respect to the concave groove 219 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Inserted obliquely from the front and fitted into a joiner type, in that state, the transparent plate 214a is erected to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It fixes with the screw | thread 603 (refer FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cut view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 35, if the player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign material to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[Door-type front member-locking device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200.

[Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that can be individually rotated by driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. And a device case 302 that plays a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

  The device case 302 has a deformed hexagonal column shape excluding three faces from the octagonal column that lies on its side to the front (player), and includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and a right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308. And a part of the arc of the reels 301 a, 301 b, and 301 c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

  In addition, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a useable state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate portion 305 is depressed. To carry.

  The configuration in which the changeable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302 as described above is closely related to a measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, a reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400 to give the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to the insertion and removal of the apparatus case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 can be changed and hung on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the direction crossing the opening 401 at the opening 401 of the case member 400 only by providing the handle 311 that can be changed as described above on the top plate 305 of the device case 302. Become. Incidentally, the conventional apparatus case has a room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member because the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle.

  In addition, the handle 311 of the embodiment is configured to swing and change between the standing use state and the lying down non-use state, but the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the non-use state is implemented. The form is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather, and stoppers 315, 315 are provided at both ends. A useable state in which fingers can be hooked, such as a structure in which the band-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted and the center is pulled up to change to a usable state in which fingers can be hooked from the obstructed non-use state of FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to the unused state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-like lower handle 316 protrudes from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the device case 302 is pushed in by grasping the lower handle 316. By pulling, it is easy to put in and out the case member 400.

[Case material]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is erected on the rear edge of the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 covers the upper surface of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plate 404, 404 and the inner surface of the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are made of metal reinforcement. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 across the opening 401 is stretched between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is assigned as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409 as a main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408, and A control board other than the main board 409 (eg, an effect control board 510 (see FIG. 44)) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443 and 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, each of which has an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132. It exists in the area | region containing an intersection, and is opened sufficiently widely than this through-hole 132,132 .... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight portion 443 is close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, since the through hole 132 can be found by searching with the periphery of the skylight portion 443 as a reference, the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator does not look into the skylight portion 443. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 project from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 serve as the back plate of the outer body 100. The boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. 2 and 5, the bosses 410 and 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later. On the other hand, the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer body 100 side are close to the wiring relay member 113. Accordingly, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end on the rear plate 405 side of the recessed step portion 412, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The concave step 412 can be smoothly fitted. Thus, the case member 400 is straightly guided to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid on the plate 105 or press-molded integrally. On the other hand, a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail member 116 having a convex shape is laid or integrally formed on the partition plate 105, and on the other hand, flanges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of the wheel 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by a swing lever-shaped stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 while being set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and the two attachments 118 and 118 suspended from the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. The operation posture engaged with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operation posture not engaged with the case member 400 as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is key-shaped as shown in FIG. 19 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is at a position facing a locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The operation posture and the non-operation posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400 while the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100 is opened on the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. The horizontal empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309 (or a horizontal triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main board 409) and the back. It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-like temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419 are formed on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, which are wiring passages that pass through the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 has the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c as a lower limit, that is, the height at which the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, it is an arrangement.

[Image display]
The image display body 500 is a panel-type unit that can display an image, for example, which includes at least a liquid crystal display (or may be a plasma display or an organic EL display). It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44). Note that the image display body 500 is attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 11 for the attachment position), and is rotated by the hinge fitting 420. It is supported freely.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an effect control board 510 is assembled on the back side of the image display body 500. For this reason, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the effect control board 510 can be integrally configured, the handling becomes easy, and the wiring connecting the two can be omitted, and the wiring in the case member 400 can be omitted. The complexity of the work space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the effect control board 510 appears so as to jump out of the case member 400, so that the workability for the effect control board 510 can be remarkably improved.

[Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. FIG. In addition, since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 is fixed to the fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, the rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the rotating member 420b. It comprises a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate. One end of a long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e by a pin P1, and a short link is connected to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is formed on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f with a pin P3, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. In addition, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-bar rotation chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is formed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C, both the lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centering on the rotation shaft 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. That is, the hinge bracket 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are not rotated. The distance from the edge side is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h that overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is expanded in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), And pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis and inserted into a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the lever mechanism and locking the image display body. It is for fixing 500 to an open position.

[Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 (on the right side in FIG. 11). A piece 421 is pivotally attached. When the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip of the lock piece 421 is engaged with a receiving portion 508 projecting from the back side of the image display body 500. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the lock piece 421 is rotatable about the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[Image display body-connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the case member 400 is operated. In this case, the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side must be opened first, and then the image display body 500 on the far side must be opened, which may reduce workability and annoyance. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. That is, the image display body 500 is rotated around the door-shaped front member 200, so that not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation.

  Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment are configured such that the pivot locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge fitting 420. However, there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the coupling tool 700 of the embodiment forms a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is accommodated in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by a stop shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it is an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connector 700 enters and exits the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative shift in movement.

  Note that the maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when it is opened 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and the increase in size of the coupler can be suppressed.

  The retaining shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, and 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved up against the urging force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving up and floating the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700. The rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is held inside, and is engaged with a hook wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. On the side of the rod 702, a knob 706 protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, and the stopper 704 is unlocked by picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like that. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the front end side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701 a is in contact with the hooking wall 702 b when the rod 702 protrudes the most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 that traverses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part 402 a inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500. Yes.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described telescopic rod-type connector 700 but also a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while being opened at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, thereby impairing smoothness. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to constantly urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 is closed by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge bracket 420, which is an element for rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the both lever mechanisms as described above, but is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. A simple one that rotates the image display 500 may be used.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above, in which the image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, since the important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the production control board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, it is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. is there.

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is attached by a finger passing through the gap 10. It can be grasped. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443), and a finger passing through the handle opening 422 is used to attach the top plate 406 to the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be gripped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be properly used for the handle 422 and the gap 10 in accordance with the place and posture of handling. For example, when the case member 400 is transported before being incorporated into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a bowl shape using the handle port 422. On the other hand, the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100 is shown in FIG. As described above, the grip port 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 so that a finger does not enter, so that the case member 400 is pulled out by placing the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 protrudes from the front center of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer body 100 is pushed or pulled by holding the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws. Therefore, the lower handle 316 protrudes in front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire region above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. In addition, a frame member 501 that surrounds a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape, is integrally formed below the image display body 500. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are bordered by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, on which an appropriate pattern is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 is an electric decoration composed of a light emission source such as an LED, a light emission control board that controls the light emission source, and a decorative member that is disposed in front of the light emission source and can transmit light. Is provided. Here, what combined the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 is demonstrated as the front opening / closing member 90 (refer FIG. 44) below.

[Image display body-frame member-illumination apparatus]
As shown in FIG. 4, lighting devices 502 are provided on the upper and lower sides of the frame member 501, and the symbols of the symbol variation display device 300 are brightly illuminated by the lighting devices 502. Since the frame member 501 is suspended below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, it is possible to bring the light source closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 has a feature that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low amount of light compared to the conventional lighting device.

  As illustrated in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 illustrated as an embodiment has a strip-like substrate that is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing (in the width direction of the slot machine 1 and in the same direction as the rotation axis of the reel 301 a...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in a row 503, and the lower lighting device 502 includes an LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed with, for example, a milky white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper illuminating device 502 is formed by disposing the LED 504 downward in a translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section upward, for example, milky white.

  Note that the upper lighting device 502 is installed obliquely downward with the lighting direction from directly below to the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation region of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  Also, if a rod-like light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-like or concave reflecting member that wraps the light source, and direct light and What is necessary is just to set so that the centerline of the main irradiation area directed by the sum total of reflected light may strike the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. As described above, if the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if some leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, there is almost no influence.

  According to experiments, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected and difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason for this is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 is reflected by the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and diffused to the whole, or the reel 301a, It is presumed that the wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

  The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can also be adopted in the lower illumination device 502, and of course, it can be adopted only in the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. 32 is a diagram in which the upper illumination device 502 in FIG. 4 is disposed on the lower side and the lower illumination device 502 is disposed on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the illumination device 502 is “lower”. And read “below” as “upper”.

  When the LED is used as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) since it is driven at a low voltage, the safety is higher than that of a conventional cold cathode tube driven at a high voltage of about 200V. ) Longer life than a cold cathode tube, (c) Stronger than a cold cathode tube that is a glass tube, (d) Multi-color emission is possible, so the range of production can be expanded, (e) Combined with an inverter Therefore, there is a merit that it is lighter than the cold-cathode tube used, and therefore the burden on the hinge fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500 is small.

[Wiring means]
For example, each of the insertion buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter simply referred to as “generic names” in the operation unit 202 of the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer main body 100. The main body 409, etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as “case member side electric component” as a generic term for the case member side electric component). Connected. In the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100. At this time, rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electrical component (housing side electrical component) and the case member side electrical component.

[Wiring means-Wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. Yes. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two in the embodiment, large and small) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as “mounting board”). It may also be referred to as a “connector connection terminal board”.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached in a non-fixed and free-movable state in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. Accordingly, FIG. As shown in Fig. 4, the movable member can move in the vertical direction and can move in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with the connector 427 at the tip of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding in a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward.

  The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or is bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 are distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by a one-dot chain line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed substantially vertically near the corners of the side plates 102 and 102 and the back plate 104, many of which are The wiring board 109 is connected to the electrical component on the main body side through the wiring opening 109 provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electrical component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is self-exposed between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) A wiring relay member 113 is installed on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to relay the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts.
(C) A vertical wiring path through which wiring passes along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 is formed.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and is connected to the main body side electrical component through the wiring path therefrom.

  In the gaming machine having the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 are connected. Since the wiring path provided along the corner (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)) is bypassed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is larger than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wirings 119 pass through the back of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c almost down the center of the back plate 104. Can be bigger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[Wiring means-connectors 425, 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 connected to the electrical components are respectively connected.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 that has a through hole 430 at a substantially central portion and protrudes on both sides of the holder main body 429, and It consists of a well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) mounted in the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8A, the wiring relay member 113 An attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 cannot be disconnected.

[Wiring Relay Board-Connector 425, 427-Temporary Stop Shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. However, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

  The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that faces the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. In this way, a substantially horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other two on the upper and lower sides, there is an interval at which the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a force in the X direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the bent state. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent into a key shape. By doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed just like pressing the button as indicated by arrow Y. It can be done easily.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is connected to the inward claw piece of the bench side plate 434 shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by being fitted between 435, 435, and 435. Of course, even if it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tips of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the parts in the case member 400 and, of course, the parts. There is no danger of damaging itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8B → FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after the case member 400 is fixed to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is bent outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 thereof contacts the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. 124 and 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state, and the attachment piece 431 is locked to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for guide is provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a supporting base and is not in contact with the case member because it is separated from the case member. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and the power supply device and other body side electrical components are provided;
(B) a model unit provided with a symbol variation display device for changing a plurality of symbols on a case member detachably attached to the outer main body, and other case member side electrical components;
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring connected to the case member side electric component;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring;
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided in the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member in a state before the model unit is mounted on the outer body. (I) A gaming machine, wherein the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means while the model unit is mounted on the outer body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the above gaming machine, the mounting of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, a connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method of automatically connecting the connectors by the operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a heavy burden is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a concern about reliability, and there is a problem that costs for the countermeasure are high. is there.

  The above gaming machine has a configuration in which one door-type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may become unstable. There is a problem that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the above gaming machine has a configuration in which one door-type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-type front member 200. After the holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is combined with a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer main body 100 and separated from the model unit 50 as shown in FIG. 5. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and gaming. In addition, only the model unit 50 is an object to be replaced when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not an object to be replaced.

[Combination of connectors 425 and 427 and connectors 124 and 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a difficult problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be coupled together. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for enhancing flexibility at the time of connection without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 as the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively attached, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction that is non-fixedly placed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “orthogonal” is not strictly 90 degrees). , Meaning that it is about 90 degrees on social belief)). In such a configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is corrected. Since it moves to correct, connector 427 and connector 125 can also be coupled. Thus, a board-fixed and inexpensive DIN standard connector can be sufficiently used.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(1) “In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors that are paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these connectors. The connector board is mounted on the connector board, the connector board is further divided for each connector, one of them is fixed to the board support member, and the other connector board is connected to the board support member in the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(2) “A plurality of symbols are attached to an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other main body-side electrical components; In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector Fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, and fixing to the printed circuit board, making a pair with each connector of the two or more connector groups f A connector connection terminal board that is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and to which a connector of the other connector group is fixed, and the connector connection terminal. The board is divided into connectors and one of them is fixed to the wiring relay member, and another connector connection terminal board is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by that.
(3) In a gaming machine having “two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to the board support member via the connector board. In addition, another connector group that is paired with these is attached to one connector holder, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder, and the other connector is connected to the connector holder in the direction of connector connection. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(4) “A plurality of symbols are provided on an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate and provided with a power supply device and other body-side electrical components; and a case member detachable from the outer body. In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector A circuit board that is fixedly attached to a printed circuit board in pairs with a fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member and each connector of the two or more connector groups Has a another connector group according to wearing type connector mounted on the wiring relay member attached to said back plate, and the connector connection terminal substrate formed by fixing a connector of the other connector group, a
A gaming machine characterized in that one connector in a connector group is fixed to the connector holder and the other connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. . "

  The above gaming machines are designed so that the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation due to manufacturing error etc. in the relative position between other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors which are not the joint aim. Accordingly, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. In addition, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard soldered to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member, and by extension, the wiring relay member, by fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness. Even if the model unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. . For this reason, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are used as a reference for coupling is compared to the opposite configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily matched.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 9, the chamfered portion C (the chamfered portion C ( If a straight chamfering or a curved chamfering is possible), the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C makes the connectors more connectable.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be movable. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a with a female thread is provided on the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 427a on both sides of the connector 427 are formed, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The loose hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 integrally. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, the back of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 and the main board 409 and the like. In FIG. The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable is inserted into the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main board 409 or the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not fall off from the cable groove 437.

  Accordingly, the main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both case member-side electrical components in the case member 400, and it is not necessary to pull out the cable 313 outside the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel substrate 312 is a non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing connectors in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferable. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) that is fully opened and the reel substrate 312 are close to each other. This is because a large working space required for inserting and removing the connector cannot be secured because of facing each other.

  However, on the other hand, the connection part of the boards (main board 409, effect control board 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 looks like it crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside as in the above embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above occurs. Absent. In addition, the wiring work is better when the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is also the wiring cost. There is room to say. Accordingly, the cable 313 is slackened with the apparatus case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the cable 313 is slackened depending on the amount of pull-out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the apparatus case 302 and the corner portion at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. The loose part of can be escaped.

  Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, it is between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. Note that wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 is not limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, the code | symbol 441 is a function separation relay terminal board.

  The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a finished product state in which the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the amusement hall. At this time, as shown in an imaginary line in FIG. 25, the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the game machine installation island are connected with a wood screw or the like. When stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight 443, The fixing member 601 is tightened over the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper beam 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper beam 600 can be selected. Further, when the entire gaming machine is replaced, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect that the hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper rail 600 (so-called fool hole formation).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used to cool the image display body 500 (not shown). Then, it passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range. Therefore, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[Design of each reel, design row]
As shown in FIG. 46, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a series of symbols (a total of 21 symbols indicated by array numbers 0 to 20) formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (symbol band) on which the symbol is marked is attached. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol rows written on the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience.

  Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, and the opening 401 (also referred to as symbol display window, hereinafter symbol). It arrange | positions so that it can visually recognize via the display window 401 (refer FIG. 47 demonstrated next).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, the types of symbols are: “7” symbol painted in red (first reel arrangement number 6 etc., hereinafter referred to as “red 7 symbol”), “painted in blue” “7” symbol (first reel arrangement number 17 etc., hereinafter referred to as “blue 7 symbol”), “BAR symbol”, “Cherry symbol with cherry symbol”, “Replay symbol”, “ "Bell 1 design", "Bell 2 design", "Watermelon design", a design described as "righteous" (hereinafter referred to as "righteous design"), a design described as "positive" (hereinafter referred to as "normal design") )

  In FIG. 46, “Red 7 design” indicates that the reel band 321a has two array numbers 3 and 6, the reel band 321b has one array number 12, and the reel band 321c has array number 10 One corresponds. “Blue 7 design” corresponds to one of array number 16 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 15 in the reel band 321c. The “BAR symbol” corresponds to one of array number 11 in the reel band 321a, two of array numbers 6 and 9 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 2 in the reel band 321c. “Cherry design” is one of array number 10 in the reel band 321a, three of array numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and array number 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. Two of the numbers correspond. The “replay symbols” are five in the reel band 321a: array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17, and in the reel band 321b, array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, In the reel band 321c, five of the array numbers 1, 5, 8, 13, 13, and 17 correspond to the reel band 321c. “Bell 1 design” has three arrangement numbers 13, 15, 18 in the reel band 321a, and five arrangement numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321b. In the reel band 321c, three of array numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond. The “bell 2 symbol” corresponds to three of array numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and two of array numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. “Watermelon design” has three arrangement numbers 9, 14, and 19 in the reel band 321a, two arrangement numbers 4 and 13 in the reel band 321b, and arrangement number 3 in the reel band 321c.・ 4, 11 and 20 correspond. The “definition symbol” corresponds to one of array number 20 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. The “normal symbol” corresponds to one of array number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 18 in the reel band 321c. In addition, the kind of design is an example, Comprising: It is not restricted to these kinds.

[Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows the enlarged portion of the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401. From the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where this symbol is displayed are “upper (or upper position)” (for example, the position where “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301a is displayed), “middle (or middle position)” (for example, , A position where the “replay symbol” of the reel 301b is displayed) and a “lower stage (or lower position)” (for example, a position where the “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, it is possible to display “number of stages × number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 by “the number of stages (3) × the number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the left side of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be unified as the display panel 501 below) on the left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401. Among them, “BET1”, “BET2 ”And“ BET 3 ”are BET lamps (bet lamps) 614. The numbers of the BET lamps (the numbers 1, 2, and 3 of“ BET 1 ”,“ BET 2 ”, and“ BET 3 ”above) are as follows. Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number corresponding to the number of medals bet), that is, “1” is one bet (the number of bets placed is one) and “2” is 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2), and “3” corresponds to 3 bets (also called a MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

  An effective arrangement is determined according to the number of bets. This “effective arrangement” is also called an effective line. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effective line. It is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. . That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, each symbol is not lined up on any active line (that is, the predetermined symbol is displayed). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not arranged on the active line), it is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In this way, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the predetermined winning combination are not arranged on the active line, it is determined that the disparate symbol combination mode (that is, the combination of lost symbols) is displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the effective line will be specifically described. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a three-wager dedicated machine, and in a normal game, the game can be executed when three medals are inserted. At this time, a straight line arrangement that rises to the right and a straight line arrangement that descends to the right are effective lines.

  Note that the effective lines are not limited to the above-described straight-up linear arrangement or the down-right linear arrangement. Furthermore, although the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a three-bet dedicated machine, the number of active lines may be changed according to the number of bets instead.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the number of bets is only 3 bets (MAX bets), and the effective line is displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 as “BAR symbol-replay symbol-definition symbol”. Only two lines, that is, a line (namely, a line rising to the right) 623b and a line displaying "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" (that is, the right-down line 623a) are valid lines.

  The combination of symbols displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” displayed on the right-down line 623a which is one of the effective lines. Since the symbol combination is a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role (replaying role), in the next game, an automatic bet can be made without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game can be executed again. It becomes. Even if “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” is displayed on the active line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols is displayed. However, the combination of the symbols “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” is displayed on the middle line that is not the active line, so that the player can grasp that the player has won the replay.

  In addition, the display panel 501 is provided with lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or blinked) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1. From the top of the figure, these lamps are an error lamp 604 on which the characters “ERR” are drawn, a replay lamp 606 on which characters “REP” are drawn, which is located immediately below the BET lamp 614, and “STR”. A start lamp 608 with the letters “INS”, a medal IN lamp 610 with the letters “INS”, and a payout number display LED 612 having two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the cumulative payout number of medals in a bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. Also good.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or flashes) when any trouble or failure occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and indicates that a trouble or the like is currently occurring. Have a role to inform.

  The replay lamp 606 has a role of notifying the player that a game can be replayed (a game can be played again without betting a new medal) when the game result is a replay (described later).

  The start lamp 608 starts to light (or flash) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of prompting the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation).

  The medal IN lamp 610 continues to light (or blink) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet), thereby having a role of prompting the player to place a bet.

  The payout number display LED 612 has a role of notifying the player of the number of medals paid out by displaying the number of payouts (number of medals to be paid out) when there is a payout of medals accompanying the game result.

[Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 48 schematically shows configurations of various mechanism elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like that are installed in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. On the main board 409, a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like are mounted.

  The above-described single-loading buttons 205 and 206, start lever 210, reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors not shown. Thus, an operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are output to the main board 409, respectively. In the main board 409, when an operation signal of the start lever 210 is detected, an internal lottery for determining an internal winning combination is performed. The main board 409 corresponds to lottery means.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

  The slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 409, and various signals are input from these devices to the main substrate 409. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include a medal discharge device 110 and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, and right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be rotated and stopped independently. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401. Is displayed while changing. The reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c correspond to symbol display means.

  The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c for detecting a reference position related to the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are provided with position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c, respectively. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 207, the solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is OFF, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out so that the medal insertion is not accepted, and even if the player inserts a medal, the medal selector 207 The medal flowing through the return basket 213 passes through the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by medal insertion nor medal storage is performed.

  The medal releasing device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the payout medals one by one in the discharge port 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been. The auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 111a. When the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds the predetermined number is sent to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, the image display 500, the error lamp 604, etc. display an error display notifying the abnormality of the medal accumulation, so that the player, the hall employee, etc. are notified that the abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c described above is output from the main board 409. The medal releasing device 110 receives a drive signal from the main board 409 according to the combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal releasing device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals necessary for payout is insufficient or there are no medals in the medal releasing device 110, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the payout sensor 110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 409, and in response, the main board 409 informs that an abnormality has occurred in the medal payout. Is displayed on the error lamp 604, the image display body 500 or the like to notify the player or hall employee that an abnormality has occurred.

  The slot machine 1 includes an effect control board 510 in addition to the main board 409. The effect control board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio amplifier). 1126, a sound source IC 1128, and the like are mounted. The effect control board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512.

  Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall via the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200.

  In addition, the power supply device 112 is attached with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can be operated only when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened. Among them, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated when changing the setting together with the setting key switch 112t.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In a game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the bet number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player rotates the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are controlled to stop. When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the active line, and necessary. Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

  As described above, the reels 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (see FIG. 46). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 401 (the combination mode of symbols displayed on the effective line) of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether a combination mode is displayed. Specifically, in the symbol display window 401, at least one of the above-mentioned effective lines (upward right line 623b and downward right line 623a) displays a combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination. It is determined whether or not. At this time, when the combination of symbols corresponding to different winning combinations is displayed on the right rising line 623b and the right falling line 623a, the combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is simultaneously displayed. It is determined that the number of medals is displayed, and the total number of medals is paid out. That is, a combination of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations is displayed on the active line in the symbol display window 401 in an overlapping manner.

  In the following, the case where the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines is the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is called the winning combination symbol). It is said that the combination is complete or the winning symbol is complete.

  The symbols of the slot machine 1 include “red 7 symbol”, “blue 7 symbol”, “BAR symbol”, “cherry symbol”, “replay symbol”, “bell 1 symbol”, “bell 2 symbol”, “watermelon symbol” ”,“ Definition design ”and“ regular design ”, as described above, among these,“ red 7 design ”,“ blue 7 design ”,“ BAR design ”,“ right design ”, and“ The “normal symbol” is a symbol that is more conspicuous and easier to identify than the other symbols. Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. These symbols can be easily stopped while aiming so that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs a stop operation because of the color and size of the symbols even while the reel is rotating. (That is, it is easy to push). Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 46, “justice symbol” and “justice symbol” can be read as “justice” in the form of a circle formed by two symbols of “justice symbol” and “justice symbol”. As described above, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other in the vertical direction.

  These symbols are merely symbolic symbols (one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but they become a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. . That is, a predetermined game privilege is given. In the following, a combination of symbols allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

[Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, a winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 50, and 51 to 53. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a winning probability for each winning combination of the slot machine 1, and is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like as a winning value determination table. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing each winning combination and a condition device established corresponding to each winning combination, and is stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance. 51 to 53 are diagrams showing symbol combinations and medal payout numbers corresponding to each condition device, which are also stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

  As a gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a general state, a preparation RT, a quasi-RT, a chance RT, a bonus inside, and a bonus are prepared. These gaming states are controlled by the main board 409 and the effect control board 510. In the main board 409, a privilege based on the internal winning combination determined as a result of the internal lottery is given. Furthermore, in the effect control board 510, a privilege is provided based on the result of the internal lottery executed on the main board 409. Benefits here include paying out medals according to the winning combination and shifting to an advantageous gaming state. The main board 409 and the effect control board 510 correspond to privilege grant means. In the slot machine 1, when the bonus is won in the general state or inside the bonus, the bonus machine is shifted to the bonus state. Further, in the general state, when the ART grant lottery is won, the process shifts to the preparation RT, and when the promotion replay is won during the preparation RT, the process shifts to the chance RT (ART). In ART, the number of continuing games of ART is determined at the time of transition, and when winning a fall replay, the state transitions to a quasi-RT or general state. Furthermore, when the number of games is added at the time of ART and the lottery is won, the number of continuing games of ART is added.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the winning probability for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state. 49, the condition devices described as “RB1” are “RB1 + chance eye 1”, “RB1 + chance eye 2”, “RB1 + watermelon 1”, “RB1 + watermelon 2”, “RB1 + cherry 1”, There are “RB1 + Cherry 2” and “RB1 + Bell 2”, which are collectively referred to as “RB1”. Similarly, for “BB2”, “BB2 + Chance 1”, “BB2 + Chance 2”, “BB2 + Watermelon 1”, “BB2 + Watermelon 2”, “BB2 + Cherry 1”, “BB2 + Cherry 2”, “BB2 + Bell 2” Are collectively described as “BB2”. Furthermore, for “BB1”, “BB1 + Chance 1”, “BB1 + Chance 2”, “BB1 + Watermelon 1”, “BB1 + Watermelon 2”, “BB1 + Cherry 1”, “BB1 + Cherry 2”, “BB1 + Bell 2” Are collectively described as “BB1”.

  When a winning combination is won as a result of the lottery, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the reel stop process described later is performed so that the symbol combination based on the activated condition device is displayed on the active line. Is called. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since one condition device and a reel control pattern correspond one-to-one, if a plurality of reel control patterns are to be prepared for one winning combination, A plurality of conditions may be satisfied for the winning combination. By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stopping points (a combination of symbols displayed on the effective line) for one winning combination. Here, regarding the symbol combinations displayed on the active line, “RB1 + Bell 2”, “Watermelon”, “AT1” to “AT10”, “ALL”, “Promotion Lip” of “RB1” shown in FIG. “5 + Falling Lip 5” will be described as an example.

  “RB1 + Bell2” is a duplicate combination in which RB1 and Bell2 are simultaneously selected and won. At this time, the condition device corresponding to both RB1 and bell 2 is operated, and it is allowed that the combination of symbols corresponding to these is displayed on the effective line, and based on this, the reel stop in step S5 described later is performed. Processing is performed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the bell 2 is displayed on the effective line, for example, nine medals are paid out as a prize, and when the symbol combination corresponding to RB1 is displayed on the effective line, the description will be given later. The RB1 game to be started is started. However, even if it is permitted that both the symbol combination corresponding to RB1 and the symbol combination corresponding to Bell 2 are displayed on the effective line, the symbol combination corresponding to Bell 2 has priority. The reel stop process is performed as displayed above. Here, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell 2 is allowed to be displayed on the active line only in the selected game. On the other hand, the combination of symbols corresponding to RB1 is not limited to the winning game, and the combination of symbols corresponding to RB1 is continuously displayed on the effective line after the next game until the combination of symbols corresponding to RB1 is displayed on the effective line. It is allowed to be displayed.

  The duplicate combination means a combination in which a plurality of combinations are selected at the same time in one lottery opportunity. For example, if the carryover combination that is carried over after the next game is selected in the first game, but the symbol combination corresponding to this carryover combination is not displayed, the first combination is played in the second game, for example. When elected, both the carryover role and the first role will be won, but in this case, since they are selected at different lottery opportunities, they do not fall under duplicate roles . On the other hand, a single combination means a combination in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity.

  In addition, BB1, BB2, RB1 and RB2 are used as bonus combinations, and the combination with medals paid out in FIGS. 51 to 53 (for example, cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2, etc.) is used as a small combination, and the same game as the previous game is executed. When a possible combination (for example, a normal lip) is a replay combination and it is allowed to be displayed on the active line for a plurality of symbol combinations at the same time, the replay combination, the small combination, and the bonus combination are dealt with in the priority order. The reel stop process described later is performed so that the combination of symbols is displayed on the active line.

  “Watermelon” is a single winning feature of watermelon. At this time, a combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon is allowed to be displayed on the active line, and based on this, a reel stop process in step S5 described later is performed. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon is displayed on the active line, for example, five medals are paid out as a prize.

  Even if one of the winning combinations is won as a result of the lottery, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped in the symbol display window 401 (that is, on the active line) within a range where the pull-in control described later can be performed. If the stop operation (operation to press the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is not performed as it is, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the active line. Therefore, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line even though one of the winning combinations is won as a result of the lottery, the game result is lost in step S6 described later. Determined.

  In “AT1” to “AT10”, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order determined for each, and the reel stop buttons 211a to 211AT in an appropriate pressing order determined for each. The number of medals to be paid out as a prize differs depending on whether 211c is not operated.

  Specifically, an appropriate pressing order for “AT1” and “AT2” is “left → middle → right” (hereinafter referred to as “forward pressing”). When the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in this proper pushing order, it is allowed that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 among the operating condition devices is displayed on the effective line. Based on this, a reel stop process in step S5 described later is performed. When the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the active line, for example, nine medals are paid out as a prize. In addition, since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the accessory 17 are arranged within a range where the reel pull-in control can be performed, when the lottery result is “AT1” or “AT2”, the symbols are pressed in an appropriate push order. As long as the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is always displayed on the active line.

  Further, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate push order, the award is awarded on one effective line when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing. A combination of symbols from which one medal will be paid out (hereinafter referred to as “one symbol payout symbol combination”) is displayed, and a combination of symbols from which two medals will be paid out as prizes on other active lines (hereinafter referred to as “two coins to be paid out”) "Design combination") is displayed. For example, “AT1” and “AT2” are “right → left → middle” and “middle → right → left”. However, if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an improper timing, the lost symbol combination is displayed on the active line. At this time, medals as prizes are not paid out.

  That is, when the lottery result is “AT1” or “AT2”, the symbol combination of the bell 1 is always displayed on the active line as long as the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order. However, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an improper pressing order, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing, the one-sheet payout symbol combination and the two-sheet payout symbol combination are changed. When the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are displayed on each active line and the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an inappropriate timing, a lost symbol combination is displayed on the effective line.

  The above “appropriate timing” when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate pressing order is different depending on whether the lottery result is “AT1” or “AT2”. Yes. More specifically, the “appropriate timing” when the lottery result is “AT1” is the “improper timing” when the lottery result is “AT2”, and the lottery result is “AT1”. The “inappropriate timing” at the time of “is an appropriate timing” when the lottery result is “AT2”.

  Further, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate push order, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated on one effective line when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing. A combination of symbols (hereinafter referred to as “two-symbol-out symbol combination”) in which two-sheet payout symbol combinations (hereinafter referred to as “two-symbol-out symbol combinations”) are displayed and four medals are paid out as prizes on other active lines. Is displayed. For example, in the case of “AT1” and “AT2”, “left → right → middle”, “left → middle → right”, “middle → right → left” It becomes. However, if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an improper timing, the lost symbol combination is displayed on the active line. At this time, medals as prizes are not paid out.

  Further, the proper pushing order for “AT3” and “AT4” is “left → right → middle” (hereinafter referred to as “scissor pushing”), and the proper pushing order for “AT5” and “AT6” is “ “Middle → Left → Right” or “Middle → Right → Left” (hereinafter referred to as “Middle press”), and the proper pressing order for “AT7” and “AT8” is “Right → Left → Middle” The proper pressing order for “AT9” and “AT10” is “right → left → middle” (hereinafter referred to as “reverse scissor pressing”). When the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in this proper pushing order, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is allowed to be displayed on the effective line, and based on this, the later-described step S5 is performed. A reel stop process is performed. However, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate push order, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing, the one-sheet payout symbol combination and the two-sheet payout symbol combination, Alternatively, the two-piece payout symbol combination and the four-piece payout symbol combination are displayed on each active line, and if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an inappropriate timing, the lost symbol combination is displayed on the active line. It becomes. Here, the “proper timing” when the lottery results are “AT3”, “AT5”, “AT7”, and “AT9”, the lottery results are “AT4”, “AT6”, “AT8”, respectively. And “incorrect timing” in the case of “AT10”, and “incorrect timing” in the case where the lottery results are “AT3”, “AT5”, “AT7” and “AT9”, respectively, The result is “improper timing” when “AT4”, “AT6”, “AT8”, and “AT10”.

  Note that when the lottery result is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an inappropriate pressing order, and the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are further inappropriately operated. In this embodiment, the symbol combination of the loss displayed on the active line by operating the button is referred to as “bell bumps”. Further, the proper pushing order for “AT5” and “AT6” is “middle → left → right” or “middle → right → left”, and there is no pushing order in which all pushing orders are inappropriate. As for the pressing order other than “Middle → Left → Right” or “Middle → Right → Left”, a part of the pressing order is an inappropriate pressing order.

  “ALL” is a role that is a lottery target only during the bonus game. When the lottery result is “ALL”, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in any push order and at any timing. Even if it exists, it is permitted that the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the effective line, and based on this, the reel stop process in step S5 described later is performed. As described above, since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the small items 17 are arranged within a range where the reel pull-in control can be performed, the symbol combination of the small items 17 is always performed when the lottery result is “ALL”. Is displayed on the active line. When the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the active line, for example, nine medals are paid out as a prize.

  “Elevation Lip 5 + Tipping Lip 5” to “Promotion Lip 1 + Tipping Lip 1” are all winning combinations of promotion replay and fall replay at the same time. Only when it is a preparation RT, a quasi-RT, and a chance RT, it is a lottery target. When “Elevation Lip 5 + Falling Lip 5” to “Promotion Lip 1 + Falling Lip 1” are selected, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper pressing order determined for each case, and each is determined. The winning combination differs depending on whether the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not operated in the proper pushing order.

  Here, a bonus role (BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2), a replay role (also called a replay role), a small role (Bell role (Bell 1, Bell 2), a cherry role (Cherry 1, Cherry 2), a watermelon role , AT exclusive combination, ALL combination, bonus game exclusive combination), single bonus combination (SB1, SB2, SB3) will be described.

[Bonus role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a bonus combination such as BB1, BB2, RB1, or RB2 is won and a combination of symbols corresponding to any of these combinations is displayed on the active line, the BB1 game, the BB2 game, A bonus game such as the RB1 game or the RB2 game is executed. This bonus game is a game that provides an opportunity for a player to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. However, as shown in FIG. 50, only the BB1 game and the BB2 game can be obtained by the player.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device (the symbol combination shown in FIG. 50) stops on at least one of the right-up line 623b and the right-down line 623a, 1 As a result of each game, a prize corresponding to the symbol combination stopped on the active line is awarded. However, in this case, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the two winning combinations is displayed on two active lines such as the right-up line 623b and the right-down line 623a at the same time, depending on the combination of the two symbols The medal is paid out as an award. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of active lines is two, but the number of active lines is three or more, and the three effective lines are simultaneously overlapped to support three or more winning combinations. When a combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed, a medal corresponding to the combination of three or more symbols may be paid out as a prize. However, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game (for example, 15) is determined in advance, and the number of medals to be paid out as one game result does not exceed this maximum number.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, single bonus combinations such as SB1, SB2, and SB3 are also prepared. When this single bonus combination is won, only in the next game, it is controlled during the SB shown in FIG. 49 according to the selected SB combination, and the lottery result is any one of “AT1” to “AT10” Sometimes an AT game is added and a lottery is performed in which an appropriate push order is taught to the player.

[Replay role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a replay combination (also referred to as a replay combination), normal replay (described as “normal lip” in FIG. 49), promotion replays 1 to 5 (in FIG. 49 “promotional lip 1” to And “falling lip 5” in FIG. 49, and “falling lip 5” are prepared. The combination mode of symbols corresponding to this replay combination is as shown in FIG. When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the active line, it is determined that the symbol combinations for replay are complete. Of the above replay combinations, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal replay is difficult for the player to grasp immediately as shown in FIG. By displaying the combination of “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol”, the player can recognize that the player has won the replay. In addition, as a symbol combination corresponding to the promoted replay, a symbol combination of “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” is displayed on the right-up line 623a. Furthermore, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the falling replay, a combination of “replay symbol-replay symbol-watermelon symbol / blue 7 symbol” on the right rising line 623a or “red 7 symbol / blue 7” on the right rising line 623a. The symbol / watermelon symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol "is displayed.

  When the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, a game privilege called a replay game is given. In this replay game, the same game as the game in which the symbol combination of replay is displayed can be executed as a replay without inserting a medal or performing a betting operation. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  A feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to consume new medals (betting new medals) in the next game instead of paying out medals. In addition, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, it can be said that, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency increases, there is very little disadvantage to the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the general state, the probability of winning is about once every 6 to 7 times (details will be described later). As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. In other words, the winning role of replay can be given a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the game progression.

  In addition, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are arranged uniformly on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are also used in the replay combination. By changing the number of other symbols (the symbols that do not constitute the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role) that are arranged between the symbols that constitute the corresponding symbol combination manner from one to four at the maximum), The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination can be aligned without the need for a selection.

  When the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed on the active line, the same game as the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed can only be executed as a replay. Further, when a combination of symbols based on the promoted replays 1 to 5 is displayed on the active line during the preparation RT or the quasi-RT, it functions as an opportunity to shift to the chance RT. Further, when a combination of symbols based on the fall replays 1 to 5 is displayed on the active line at the chance RT, it functions as an opportunity to shift to the quasi-RT or general state.

[Bell role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” are prepared as bells as described above. The combinations of symbols corresponding to the bell combination are as shown in FIGS. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the bell combination is displayed on the active line, it is determined that the combination of symbols of the bell combination is complete, and medals (for example, nine) as awards are paid out. As shown in FIG. 49, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell 2 is difficult for the player to grasp immediately. However, the “bell 1 symbol or bell 2 symbol” is displayed on the middle line of the non-effective line. By displaying a combination of “bell 1 symbol-bell 1 symbol or bell 2 symbol”, the player can recognize that the player has won the bell 2. In addition, although the bell 1 symbol and the bell 2 symbol are slightly different in form, both symbols are common in that the same idea such as a bell is caused to the player.

  When a symbol combination corresponding to Bell 1 or a symbol combination corresponding to Bell 2 is displayed on the active line, a predetermined number (for example, nine) of medals are paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. As described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell 1 or the bell 2 can be expected to increase the number of medals or suppress the consumption of medals when the game is advanced. However, if the frequency of the symbol combination corresponding to Bell 1 or the symbol combination corresponding to Bell 2 being displayed on the active line increases, the player can increase the number of medals simply by proceeding with the game. . It should be noted that the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 and the symbols corresponding to the bell 2 are arranged on each reel so that they can be displayed on the effective line without going to the center. .

[Cherry role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “Cherry 1” and “Cherry 2” are prepared as the cherry roles as described above. The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to this cherry combination is as shown in FIGS. When the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination is displayed on the active line, it is determined that the symbol combination of the cherry combination is complete, and a medal (for example, two) as a prize is paid out.

[As watermelon]
The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the watermelon combination is as shown in FIGS. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon combination is displayed on the active line, it is determined that the combination of symbols of the watermelon combination is complete, and medals (for example, five) as awards are paid out.

[AT exclusive role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “AT1” to “AT10” are prepared as AT exclusive roles as described above. The combinations of symbols corresponding to these AT exclusive roles are as shown in FIGS. That is, if the result of the lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10” and the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order, the corresponding condition device corresponds to the accessory 17. The combination of symbols is displayed on the active line. However, even if the result of the lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not operated in an appropriate pressing order, and all the pressing orders are incorrect. When the operation is performed at an appropriate timing, the one-sheet payout symbol combination and the two-sheet payout symbol combination are displayed on two lines, respectively. In addition, when a part of the pressing order is operated with an inappropriate pressing order and an appropriate timing, the two-sheet payout symbol combination and the four-sheet payout symbol combination are respectively displayed on two lines.

[ALL role]
The symbol combinations corresponding to the ALL combination are as shown in FIGS. However, even if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in any pushing order and at any timing, the reel control is performed so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the accessory 17 among the activated condition devices is displayed on the effective line. Is done.

[Special Bonus Game]
Furthermore, there is a bonus game exclusive role as a winning combination that is effective only during the bonus game (in the BB1, BB2, RB1, and RB2 games). This bonus game exclusive combination corresponds to the “logo” in FIG. 49, and the combinations of symbols (bonus game exclusive combination symbols) corresponding to these are as shown in FIG.

  When bonus game exclusive role symbols are arranged during the bonus game, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of medals are paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. That is, a gaming privilege of paying out 10 medals is awarded when the bonus game exclusive role symbols are arranged. Further, during the bonus game, by making it easy to align the bonus game exclusive roles, it is possible to concentrate and execute a game that is easy to obtain medals. Therefore, the symbols constituting the combination of bonus game exclusive role symbols can be aligned on the active line without pressing.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the bonus game, the bonus game exclusive combination and the ALL combination are subject to lottery, but a winning combination different from these may be provided. Furthermore, a bonus combination such as a bell or a watermelon may be used instead of a bonus game limited winning combination such as a bonus game exclusive combination. In this case, the number of medals to be paid out may be changed between the general state and the bonus game.

[Loose]
If none of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. Then, in the game that is lost, no medal is given, and no change is made to the game after the next time. It can be said that the loser is a role that does not give the player any game privilege in the game and the next and subsequent games. In addition, when a loss occurs in the general state, a part, specifically, a winning combination is obtained at a ratio of 2/37263. The symbol combination of the final winning combination is determined by the same procedure as that for losing. When the winning combination is made, the winning probability of the chance RT shift lottery described later is increased.

  The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination.

  Note that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and symbol combinations described above. In addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. In addition, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

[Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed on the main board 409 (mainly CPU 1110 or the like).

  FIG. 54 shows one processing sequence for one basic game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, return to the state before the power was turned off. Execute.

  In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the single insertion button 205). Thus, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the number of bets for one game is determined and the BET process is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a three-wager dedicated machine that can execute a game by inserting three medals. Therefore, the single sheet insertion button 205 may not be provided.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is either in the stage before all reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the next step S4 are in a stopped state (stopped by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the active line. It is allowed to stop.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of acceptance, and rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped. Execute.

  In the next step S6, in step S5, a line 623b on which "bar symbol-replay symbol-normal symbol" is displayed (that is, a line rising to the right) 623b and "bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" are displayed. When it is determined that all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state with only two lines of the current line (that is, the right-down line 623a) as the effective lines, the display content (the symbol of the symbol) The combination mode) is compared with what is permitted as a result of the internal lottery determined in step S3, and a determination process for determining the winning combination is executed.

  In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. When the winning combination is BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2, SB1, SB2, or replay, the game state is changed (the game state is changed as shown in FIG. 49), and various game benefits such as re-playing are executed. To do.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process), step S3 (internal lottery process), and step S4 (reel rotation process) are performed by the player as a series of external operations. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[Startup process]
FIG. 55 specifically shows each process performed in the starting process.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the operation of the medal insertion or one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. This determination is satisfied only when a medal corresponding to a MAX bet is inserted (that is, when three or more medals are inserted), or when a one-sheet insertion button 205 or a MAX insertion button 206 is operated as a MAX bet. It is supposed to be.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined, and the active line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a three-wager dedicated machine, and when three medals are inserted, two lines, a right-up line 623b and a right-down line 623a, become effective lines, which indicate this. Turn on the line lamp.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform a bet operation or medal insertion in step S101 or does not result in a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, an output conversion control process is performed. In the output conversion control process, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is set. When it is determined that the freeze flag is set, the freeze timer is set and started. Freeze control is executed while the freeze timer is counted, and the output conversion control process is executed while this freeze control is being executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S107. Details of the output conversion control process will be further described later. If it is determined that the freeze flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S107 without setting the freeze timer.

  In step S107, when the start lever 210 is operated, random numbers are extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S108. As for the timing for extracting the random number at this time, an appropriate extraction timing should be set in the programming process, for example, immediately after the start lever 210 is operated or after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds). Can do.

  In step S108, a winning determination (matching of the random number value) of which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number value) is performed. In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON (= 1) (see FIG. 50). In addition, the winning probability for each winning combination in the winning determination performed by comparing the extracted random number value with the winning determination table is as shown in FIG.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A hit value determination table in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. The game state flags include a preparation RT flag, a quasi-RT flag, a chance RT flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When any of these game state flags is in the OFF (= 0) state, the general state flag is always in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S108 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and neither condition device is operated (see FIG. 50). ). Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (when established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices. The symbol combinations corresponding to each condition device are as shown in FIGS. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices is established, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the effective line. Steps S107 and S108 described above are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. Note that the process from extraction of the random number to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 54 described above).

  In the next step S109, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has timed up (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S110. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S110, it is determined whether or not the freeze timer started in the output conversion control process has expired. The time at which the freeze timer is timed up is determined by a freeze time determination process described later, and the output conversion control is executed before the freeze timer expires. This determination loops until the freeze timer expires.

  In step S111, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) by the player is accepted. .

  Next, in step S112, the wait timer is reset and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination corresponding to the game (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding winning combination). If the winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the information of the activated condition device is processed as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery (reel stop processing, Determination processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a random value range (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined as, for example, an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 214 = 16384 random numbers). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is set to 0 to 59999 for convenience, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this. If this random number extraction range is expanded, the range of random values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased, so that it is difficult to cause an event that specific random values are extracted in a biased manner.

Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, if the random value corresponding to RB2 is “1” among the random values in the extraction range (0 to 59999 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment), the extracted random value is “1”. The result of the internal lottery is “RB 2 is won”, and the condition device of RB 2 is processed as an information command in the game. Further, when this is used, the winning probability of RB2 (probability that RB2 is selected as a result of internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to RB2. In the above example (RB2),
[Total number of random values corresponding to RB2 / Total number of random values in the extraction range]
Is 2/60000, and the winning probability of RB2 is 1/30000.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (RB2), the random value “1” in the extraction range is the winning value corresponding to RB2. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined role is set to consecutive random values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, The range of values is a random value “1” to “4”. When it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any one of the random number values “1” to “4” (verified), the result of the internal lottery is “winning a predetermined role”. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to a single combination (for example, RB2, Bell 1, Bell 2, etc.) that is won only for one winning combination, a plurality of winning combinations (for example, “RB1 +”, for example) Bell 2 ”,“ BB2 + bell 1 ”, etc.). Therefore, with respect to such a duplicated role, the winning value of the duplicated role is also included in the above-mentioned winning value.

  From this, the range of winning values for all winning combinations is determined, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any winning combination by internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it is lost. In other words, the range of the winning value of the lost game is other than the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be referred to as a winning allowable value.

  By the way, a single combination corresponds to one winning combination corresponding to one extracted random value, and a duplicate combination refers to a plurality (in this case, two) winning combinations for one extracted random value. Corresponds. That is, if the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the duplicate combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. For example, if the extracted random value corresponds to the winning value corresponding to “promotional lip 5 + falling lip 5” shown in FIG. 49, the above flag processing (see step S107 in FIG. 55), FIG. As shown, the condition device corresponding to the promotion lip 5 and the condition device corresponding to the falling lip 5 are simultaneously established.

  As shown in FIG. 49, during the bonus, the winning value of the ALL combination and bonus game exclusive combination (logo) occupies most of the extraction range. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large number of medals are paid out within the period during which the bonus game is executed.

[Game state transition]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a gaming state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

  First, it is determined whether or not a bonus game (BG) such as a BB1 game, a BB2 game, an RB1 game, or an RB2 game is being played (step S151), and the bonus game is ended when it is determined that the bonus game is being played. Whether or not (BGE) is determined (step S152). Here, if it is determined that the bonus game has ended (YES in step S152), the game state before the transition to the bonus game or inside the bonus, for example, the general state (GGC) is shifted (step S153). If it is determined that the bonus game has not ended, this determination is looped until the bonus game ends.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game (BB1 game, BB2 game, RB1 game, RB2 game) is not being played (NO in step S151), it is determined whether the bonus is being played (BI) (step S154). ). That is, when a bonus combination (BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2) is won in the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated. The condition device corresponding to this bonus combination is a bonus in the game won in the internal lottery. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the effective line, it continues to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus winning combination is displayed on the effective line after the next game. Then, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (BG) (YES in step S155), the process proceeds to the bonus (step S156), and the bonus game (BG) is executed.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the bonus is not inside (NO in step S154), it is determined whether it is a preparation RT (PRT) or a quasi-RT (SRT) (step S157). When it is determined that the RT is a preparation RT or a quasi-RT (YES in step S157), it is determined whether or not a promotion replay (PRP) is won (step S158).

  If it is determined that the promotion replay has been won (YES in step S158), the process proceeds to a chance RT (CRT) (Sstep S159). If it is determined that the promotion replay has not been won (NO in step S158), it is determined whether or not the fall replay has been won (DRP) (step S160). If it is determined that the player has won the fall replay (YES in step S160), the gaming state is shifted to the general state (GGC) (step S161). If it is determined that the drop replay has not been won (NO in step S160), the process returns to step S158, and the determination in steps S158 and S160 is looped until a promotion replay or a fall replay is won.

  If it is determined in step S157 that it is not a preparation RT or a quasi-RT (NO in step S157), it is determined whether or not it is a chance RT (CRT) (S162). When it is determined that it is the chance RT (YES in step S162), it is determined whether or not a fall replay (DRP) has been won (step S163).

  If it is determined that the fall replay has been won (YES in step S163), it is determined whether or not the proper push order has been taught (NAVI) in the game that has won the fall replay (step S164). If it is determined that the proper pushing order has been taught (YES in step S164), the process proceeds to quasi-RT (SRT) (step S165). On the other hand, if it is determined that the proper pressing order is not taught (NO in step S164), the process proceeds to the general state (GGC) (step S166). If it is determined that the fall replay has not been won (NO in step S163), step S163 is looped until it is determined that the fall replay has been won.

  If it is determined in step S162 that it is not the chance RT (NO in step S162), the gaming state is in the general state. At this time, it is determined whether or not the ART grant lottery is won (ARTGL) (step S167). As shown in FIG. 57, the ART grant lottery is a lottery executed when winning a so-called small role such as cherry 2 (weak cherry), cherry 1 (strong cherry), watermelon, or a confirmed role. When each small role is won, the ART grant lottery is won at the rate shown in FIG. Further, the ART grant lottery is also executed when each small role or the like is displayed in the output conversion control. The ART grant lottery will be further described later. If the ART grant lottery is won (YES in step S167), the gaming state shifts to preparation RT (step S168). If the ART grant lottery is not won (NO in step S167), the general state is maintained. On the other hand, when the bonus game is won during the preparation RT, the quasi-RT, the chance RT, and the general state, the inside of the bonus is transferred.

  In the general state, when a game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals betted by the player for executing the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game. Also, in the preparation RT and the quasi-RT, when the game is executed over a certain period, the player executes the game more than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period, as in the general state. More medals to bet. That is, the preparation RT and the quasi-RT are gaming states in which the number of medals decreases along with the player executing the game, as in the general state.

  Further, the probability that each winning combination wins in the internal lottery in each game state in the general state, preparation RT, quasi-RT, chance RT, inside bonus, and bonus is as shown in FIG.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the result information of the internal lottery is output from the main board 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 as an information command. The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 that has received the result information of the internal lottery output from the main board 409 includes means for executing an effect using, for example, the image display 500 or / and the speaker 512 based on the result information. . For example, in the preparation RT, quasi-RT, and chance RT, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, an appropriate pressing order for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is, for example, an image display It is taught by navigating the production using the body 500 or / and the speaker 512. This proper push order navigation (hereinafter referred to as “push order navigation”) will be described in detail later. Further, the push order navigation is not performed, for example, during the general state or during the bonus game. Therefore, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, “AT1” to “AT1” are controlled when the chance RT is controlled rather than when controlled to the general state. It is easy for the player to display the symbol combination corresponding to “AT10” on the active line. In this respect, the chance RT can be said to be a gaming state that is more advantageous for the player than the general state.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, it is set as said specific conditions that the reel stop buttons 211a-211c are operated by the proper pushing order. Specifically, when duplicated replays of promoted replays 1 to 5 and fall replays 1 to 5 are selected by internal lottery, “left → middle → right” is pushed in order, “left → right → middle” "Scissors", "Middle → Left → Right" or "Middle → Right → Left" middle press, "Right → Left → Middle" reverse press, and "Right → Left → Middle" reverse scissor press Any one of the pressing orders is determined as an appropriate pressing order. In this case, although the push order is different from the proper push order, two push orders in which some push orders are in common with the proper push order are determined and all push orders are wrong. The push order is determined in two ways. However, in the case of middle press, there are two types of proper push order: “middle → left → right” or “middle → right → left”. , "Middle → left → right" is determined based on the pressing order. As a result, two kinds of pushing orders in which some of the pushing orders are inappropriate are determined, and two pushing orders in which the whole pushing order is inappropriate are determined. When the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order or a partial pressing order that is not appropriate, a prize is awarded to one of the promotion replays 1 to 5. Further, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an improper push order, the winning replays 1 to 5 are won.

  In addition, when an overlapping combination of a fall replay combination and a normal replay combination is selected by internal lottery, it is determined in any one of the above five pressing orders. The number in the pressing order is not limited to 1 and may be 2 or more.

  Needless to say, the procedure for winning the promotion replay is not limited to the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the proper pushing order. For example, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c may be stopped so that at least one reel or all of the three reels 301a to 301c are stopped at an appropriate timing.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a preparation RT, a quasi-RT, and a chance RT game in addition to the general state as the gaming state. Hereinafter, these RT games will be described.

[Preparation RT]
The preparation RT is a gaming state that shifts when a predetermined ART grant lottery is won in the general state. As can be seen from FIG. 49, the winning probability of replay is easier to win than the general state. Yes. Further, during preparation RT, when any one of promotion replay 1 to promotion replay 5 is won, the process proceeds to chance RT. Further, if any of “AT1” to “AT10” is selected during the preparation RT, a push order navigation that teaches an appropriate push order is executed, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are executed according to the executed push order navigation. By operating the symbol combination, it is possible to display a symbol combination that allows nine sheets to be easily paid out.

[Quasi-RT]
The quasi-RT is a gaming state that is shifted when a fall replay is won in the chance RT, and the gaming state other than the chance RT is not shifted to the quasi-RT. As can be seen from FIG. 49, the winning probability of replay is easier to win than in the general state. Further, during the quasi-RT, when any one of the promotion replay 1 to the promotion replay 5 is won, the process shifts to the chance RT. Although the quasi-RT has the same replay win probability as the preparatory RT, the win probabilities for the promoted replays 1 to 5 are set higher. For this reason, the quasi-RT is easier to shift to the chance RT than the preparation RT. Further, in the general state, the transition is made to the chance RT through the preparation RT, and the preparation RT and the quasi-RT are easier to transition to the chance RT than in the general state. In addition, if any one of “AT1” to “AT10” is selected during the quasi-RT, a push order navigation that teaches an appropriate push order is executed, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are executed according to the executed push order navigation. By operating the symbol combination, it is possible to display a symbol combination that allows nine sheets to be easily paid out.

[Chance RT]
The chance RT is a game in a game period from the start of the chance RT until the number of continuing games becomes zero. In this chance RT, as shown in FIG. 49, the winning probability of replay is a general state. It is easier to win than. Further, if any one of “AT1” to “AT10” is won during the chance RT, a push order navigation that teaches an appropriate push order is executed, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are executed according to the executed push order navigation. By operating the symbol combination, it is possible to display a symbol combination that allows nine sheets to be easily paid out.

  Further, when the chance RT is started, the number of continuing games of the chance RT is determined. In the chance RT, when a falling replay is won before the number of continuing games becomes 0, the transition is made to a quasi-RT, and after the number of continuing games becomes 0, a transition to the general state is made by winning a falling replay. Before the number of continuing games reaches 0, in order to avoid the fall replay winning in order to avoid the transition to the semi-RT, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 causes the image display 500 or / and the speaker 512, for example. The used push order navigation effect is executed. That is, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, an effect that prompts the user to operate the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in an appropriate pushing order so that the falling replay does not win, or The operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c at an appropriate timing is prompted. By operating the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c according to the push order navigation, it is possible to continue the chance RT while avoiding the falling replay winning for the number of continued games.

  Then, when the number of continuous games is consumed, the push navigation effect is not executed. Thereafter, when the condition device of “elevation lip + falling lip” is activated, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are set in an appropriate push order or a part of the push order in an inappropriate push order according to the player's intuition. By operating, the fall (shift) from the chance RT to the general state can be avoided. However, when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated in an improper order of pushing because the intuition is lost, the gaming state falls from the chance RT to the general state.

  Further, during the chance RT, the game is executed in a manner that allows the player to recognize (identify) that the gaming state is during the chance RT. Specifically, it is possible to identify by chance RT display (by the image display body 500 or the like) or sound effects (by the speaker 512 or the like).

  The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of set values (six levels from set values 1 to 6) (each not shown). In each set value, a difference (step difference, extreme difference, etc.) is given to the internal lottery probability. This setting value is a probability of transition to bonus winning combination or chance RT (ART) as the setting value increases, such as setting value 1 <setting value 2 <setting value 3 <setting value 4 <setting value 5 <setting value 6 Should be preferential. For example, compared to the set value 1, the set value 4 has a high probability of winning BB1, so the possibility of winning BB1 is high. By providing stepwise set values in this way, the slot machine 1 can be used as a clue when the player guesses the set value by giving a characteristic to each set value or according to the management of the hall or the like. Can be operated. The setting value is not limited to the above.

[Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping a reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is waited. FIG. 58 shows the content of reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected in accordance with a condition device that operates in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with patterns corresponding to all the condition devices in a one-to-one correspondence, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the conditional device established in step S201 described above, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (stop operation procedure) is “forward pressing”, “scissor pressing”, “reverse pressing”, “reverse scissor pressing”, “middle pressing”, respectively. Is divided into stop operation procedures (also referred to as push orders).

  The stop operation procedure of the “forward push” is an operation of stopping the left reel 301a first, subsequently stopping the middle reel 301b second, and finally stopping the right reel 301c third. Refers to the procedure. The “scissor push” stop operation procedure is to stop the left reel 301a first, subsequently stop the right reel 301c second, and finally stop the middle reel 301b third. Refers to the procedure. Note that “forward press” and “scissor press” may be collectively expressed as “forward press”.

  The “reverse push” stop operation procedure is as follows. In contrast to “forward push”, the right reel 301c is stopped first, then the middle reel 301b is stopped second, and finally the left reel 301a is turned off. This is the third operating procedure to stop. The “reverse scissor pushing” stop operation procedure is to stop the right reel 301c first, then stop the left reel 301a second, and finally stop the middle reel 301b third. An operating procedure. Note that “reverse pressing” and “reverse scissor pressing” may be collectively expressed as “reverse pressing”.

The above-mentioned “middle push” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 301b first (that is, a procedure for pressing the middle reel stop button 211b first). From the operation order of reels to be stopped later,
[Center reel → Left reel → Right reel],
Or
The operation is further divided into two stop operation procedures [middle reel → right reel → left reel]. These two are collectively referred to as “middle press”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. If it is assumed in step S201 that the left reel stop button 211a is first pressed (first) in accordance with the “forward press” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202 is performed. The determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

  In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the slot machine 1 has only two effective lines, a right-up line and a right-down line, there is only one stop control table for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) at this time. Can be determined. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper or lower position can be the winning combination symbol. If the symbol has a characteristic, a reel stop control table is selected that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the symbol. It will be.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203 described above. At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning winning symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). Execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stopped reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made, and the details are omitted. However, since the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure is partially different from the above description, it will be described below.

  The “reverse push” stop operation procedure differs from the “forward push” or “middle push” stop operation procedure described above in step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). is there. That is, in the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is stopped, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stops of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid It is possible to arrange the winning symbols in any line. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

[Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control for drawing the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control) is performed. Specifically, when a player's reel stop operation is accepted, a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (a range in which the corresponding winning symbol can be drawn, for example, four symbols). Minutes) is determined in advance, and if the corresponding winning combination symbol is within the range, control is performed to pull the symbol into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reel. The “retractable range” here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel from when the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the pullable range is a maximum of 4 symbols, when a reel stop operation is accepted, the reel can be further rotated up to 4 symbols based on the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is received, the corresponding winning symbol is within the range that can be drawn. If there is, the winning winning symbol can be moved to the symbol display window 401 and stopped. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  In the slot machine 1, when the condition devices corresponding to the replay role, the bell 1, the bell 2, the ALL role, etc. are operating, it is possible to always align the corresponding winning role symbols without requiring the player's attention. Yes (see FIG. 46 above). This means that for the symbols constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay role, bell 1, bell 2, ALL role, etc., each corresponding winning symbol is arranged every four symbols at the maximum. Because.

  Further attention is paid to the replay symbols. On the left reel 301a, a maximum of four other symbols are arranged between the replay symbols and the replay symbols (see FIG. 46). As a result, in the left reel 301a, regardless of the position of the reel at which the stop operation is accepted, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay function is operating, the replay symbol is always drawn into one of the active lines and stopped. be able to.

  Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a double combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn over the bonus symbol. If a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if a symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in the winning game, a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination will be displayed in the next game or later. It is.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In this embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be determined as appropriate when constructing the control program.

[Determination process]
When the reel stop processing is completed, whether or not the winning combination symbols are arranged on any active line in the symbol display window 401 (whether the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed) or not. Make a decision. In FIG. 59, the content of this determination process is demonstrated concretely.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop process, the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the active lines from the stop eye form in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination) It is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols to be displayed is displayed). It should be noted that the stop eye particularly when all the reels are in a stopped state is sometimes referred to as an outcome.

  In steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether the player is in the RB game (in RB) or the BB game (in BB). This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of the game state flags of the RB game flag and the BB game flag.

  If the RB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S301 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S380. If the BB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S302 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S370. If both the RB game flag and the BB game flag are OFF (= 0), the determinations in steps S301 and S302 are not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S303.

  After executing the RT game end determination process (RTEP, details will be described later) in step S303, the following steps S310, S320, S340, S350 are further performed according to the winning combination symbols arranged on any of the active lines. Move on to either.

  In step S310, it is determined whether BB symbols are available (BBPD). If there is a BB symbol ("Red 7 symbol-Red 7 symbol-Red 7 symbol" or "Blue 7 symbol-Blue 7 symbol-Blue 7 symbol") on any active line, this determination is satisfied, The process moves to the next step S312.

  In the next step S312, a BB game start process is executed (BBSP). Here, as a BB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games where medals can be easily obtained is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S320, it is determined whether RB symbols are available (RBPD). If there is an RB symbol (“Red 7 symbol-Red 7 symbol-Blue 7 symbol” or “Blue 7 symbol-Blue 7 symbol-Red 7 symbol”) on any active line, this determination is satisfied, The process moves to the next step S322.

  In the next step S322, an RB game start process is executed (RBSP). Here, as an RB game, a process for concentrating and playing a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained according to the BB game is performed (details will be described later).

  In step S340, it is determined whether replay symbols are available (RPPD). When the replay symbols are aligned on any of the active lines (“replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol”), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S342.

  In the next step S342, a replay game process is executed (RPGP). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay.

  In step S344, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (RPHF ← 0), and the process ends.

  In step S350, it is determined whether the small role symbols are available (SFPD). If any small combination is won, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S351.

  In the next step S351, RT game start processing is performed (RTSP). The RT game start process refers to the result of the ART grant lottery executed based on the winning role by the winning small role, and if the ART grant lottery is won, the RT game is started and the ART grant lottery is performed. If the game is not won, a process that does not start the RT game is performed.

  In the next step S352, when a small role symbol is aligned on any active line, a specified number of medals are paid out according to the aligned small role symbols (specified by MOP and medal releasing device 110). Pay out the number of medals). Then, the medal payout number is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). Thereby, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small role has been paid out.

  In step S354, the corresponding small role winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (SFHF ← 0), and the process ends.

  If none of the winning combination symbols are on the active line, none of the determinations in steps S310, S320, S340, and S350 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S360. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”.

  In step S360, a loss process is executed (MIP). In this losing process, when the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is a winning flag other than BB and RB, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  The processing from step S303 to step S360 described above is processing executed in the case of the general state, preparation RT, quasi-RT, and chance RT. Next, the processing after step S370 will be described. The process here is a process executed in the case of a BB game (BB1 game, BB2 game) and an RB game (RB1 game, RB2 game).

  First, in step S370, it is determined whether or not the BB game payout symbols are complete (OP during BB). The “BB game payout combination” here is a general term for the ALL combination and the bonus game exclusive combination. Then, when the BB game payout symbols are aligned on any of the active lines, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S372.

  In the next step S372, a predetermined number of medals are paid out in accordance with the BB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the MOP and medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the BB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Subsequent to step S372, in step S374, a BB game end determination process (BBEP) is executed (details will be described later).

  If the determination in step S370 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 378, where the establishment flag is set to OFF (= 0) (CIEF ← 0). In particular, in this example, since no omission occurs, the lost flag corresponds to the establishment flag. That is, in step S378, the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  Next, step S380 and subsequent steps will be described. In step S380, it is determined whether or not the RB game payout symbols are available (OP during RB). The “RB game payout” is also a collective term for the winning combination having a payout during the RB game, as in the above-mentioned BB game payout. In this embodiment, the same as the “BB game payout”. It is. If there are RB game payout symbols on any active line, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S382.

  In the next step S382, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the RB game payout symbols that have been prepared (a MOP, a specified number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), so that the player is notified (notification, display) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the RB game payout combination has been paid out. )

  Following step S382, in step S384, an RB game end determination process (RBEP) is executed (details will be described later).

  If the determination in step S380 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 378 described above, and the establishment flag is turned OFF (= 0). Since this was demonstrated previously, description is abbreviate | omitted.

[BB game start processing]
If the determination in step S310 in FIG. 59 is satisfied, the BB game start process is executed. This BB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether BB flags (BBF) such as the BB1 flag and the BB2 flag are ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the BB game flag (BBGF) is turned ON (= 1). Although not shown, the BB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the BB game is cleared (ACCC during BB). Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. From the next game, the BB game is started with the same bet number of 3 bets (3 bets) as in the normal game.

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402, and error processing (ER processing) is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the BB symbols are aligned even though the BB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[BB game end determination process]
Subsequently, the BB game end determination process in step S374 of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S372 of FIG. 59 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the BB game (ACCUP during BB).

  In step S452, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number has exceeded 300 (200 in the case of BB2) (AAC> TH). If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, and the cumulative payout number during the BB game is displayed (APCS during BB). In this step, the payout number display LED 612 is displayed. Note that the cumulative payout number may be displayed by separately providing a display LED or the like. If the determination in step S452 is satisfied, the process moves to step S460.

  In step S460, the BB game in-progress flag (BBGF) is set to OFF (= 0), and the process ends.

[RB game start processing]
If the determination in step S320 of FIG. 59 is satisfied, an RB game start process is executed. This RB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether RB flags (RBF) such as the RB1 flag and the RB2 flag are ON (= 1). When the determination in step S501 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S504. In step S504, the RB game flag (RBGF) is turned ON (= 1). Although not shown, the RB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, in step S506, the cumulative payout number count (ACCC during RB) during the RB game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. From the next game, the RB game is started with the same bet number of 3 bets (3 bets) as in the normal game. As a result, the player can play the game without feeling special discomfort compared to the normal game.

  If the determination in step S501 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S502, and error processing (ER processing) is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where RB symbols are aligned even though the RB flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[RB game end determination processing]
Subsequently, the RB game end determination process in step S384 of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S551, in response to the payout of medals in step S382 of FIG. 59 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the RB game (ACCUP during RB).

  In step S552, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number (AAC) exceeds 20. If the determination in step S552 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S554, and the cumulative payout number during the RB game is displayed (APCS during RB). In this step, the payout number display LED 612 is displayed. Note that the cumulative payout number may be displayed by separately providing a display LED or the like.

  If the determination in step S552 is satisfied, the process moves to step S556.

  In step S556, the RB game flag (RBGF) is set to OFF (= 0), and the process ends.

[RT game start processing]
Next, the RT game start process in step S351 of FIG. 59 described above will be described. The RT game is a game that is executed in a preparation RT, a quasi-RT, or a chance RT, and is executed when an ART grant lottery is won in a general state. If the ART grant lottery is won in the general state, the process proceeds to preparation RT. In addition, when the promotion replay is won during the preparation RT or the quasi-RT, the game proceeds to the chance RT. Further, during the chance RT, when the player falls into the fall replay in a state where the push order navigation is executed, the game shifts to the semi-RT, and when the player falls into the fall replay in a state where the push order navigation is not executed, the game moves to the general state.

  When the ART grant lottery is won once in the general state, one set of chance RT games is executed. In addition, when a lottery with an additional number of games is performed during the chance RT game, the number of continuous games separately determined is increased each time the number of games is added and the lottery is won. Further, when a lottery with an additional number of sets is performed during the chance RT game, the number of sets separately determined is increased each time the winning is performed with the additional number of sets. The chance RT game is continued until all of the added chance RT games for the number of continued games are consumed. Hereinafter, the RT game start process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether the gaming state is a general state (GGC). If it is determined that the gaming state is the general state, it is determined in step S802 whether or not an ART grant lottery (ARTGL) has been won. Here, if it is determined that the ART grant lottery is not won, the processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART grant lottery is won, the preparation RT flag (SRTF) is turned ON (= 1) in step S804.

  If it is determined in step S801 that the game state is not a general state (NO in step S801), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a preparation RT or a quasi-RT (step S810). If it is determined whether the gaming state is a preparation RT or a quasi-RT (YES in step S810), it is determined whether or not a promotion lip (PRP) has been won (step S811).

  Here, if it is determined that the promotion lip has not been won (NO in step S811), the processing ends. If it is determined that the promotion lip has been won (YES in step S811), the chance RT flag (CRTF) is turned ON (= 1) (step S813), the preparation RT flag (PRTF) and the quasi-RT flag (SRTF) Is set to OFF (= 0). Thereafter, the number of continuation games (CRTN) of the chance RT is set to “50 times” (step S817), and the process ends.

  Furthermore, when it is determined in step S810 that the RT is not a preparation RT or a quasi-RT (NO in step S810), it is a chance RT (step S820). In this case, it is determined whether or not a lottery (GNU) with the number of games is won (step S821). If it is determined that the number of games is added and the lottery is won, the number of games to be added (α) is determined, and the number of games is added to the number of continued games of chance RT (step S823). In addition, a lottery may be performed by adding the number of games instead of a lottery by adding the number of games. When the number of sets is added and the lottery is won, the number of sets of chance RT games is added. Thereafter, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S821 that the number of games is not added and the lottery is not won (NO in step S821), the process is terminated.

[RT game end determination processing]
Next, the RT game end determination process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the determination process of FIG. 59 described above, the RT game end determination process is executed during the preparation RT, the quasi-RT, and the chance RT.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether the chance RT flag (CRTF) is ON (= 1). When this determination is satisfied, in the next step S902, the number of continued games (ARTN) of the chance RT is subtracted by “1”, and the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, it is determined whether or not a fall replay has been won. If no prize has been won for the fall replay, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has won the fall replay, it is determined whether or not the proper push order has been taught (NAVI) in the game that has won the fall replay (step S906). If it is determined that the proper push order has been taught (YES in step S906), a so-called push standard error has occurred, so the semi-RT flag (SRTF) is turned ON (= 1). Thereafter, the chance RT flag is turned OFF (= 0), and the process is terminated (step S910).

  If it is determined in step S906 that the proper push order is not taught (NO in step S906), the number of continued games in the chance RT is exhausted, and no push order navigation has occurred. . In this case, in order to shift to the general state, the chance RT flag is set to OFF (= 0) as it is, and the processing is ended (step S910).

  Further, if it is determined in step S901 that the chance RT flag is not ON, it is determined whether or not the preparation RT flag (PRTF) or the quasi-RT flag (SRTF) is ON (= 1) ( Step S912). If it is determined that the preparation RT flag or the quasi-RT flag is ON (= 1), the process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the preparation RT flag or the quasi-RT flag is ON (= 1), it is determined whether or not a fall replay is won (S914). Here, if it is determined that the fall replay is won, the preparation RT flag and the quasi-RT flag are turned OFF (= 0). In this way, the gaming state is shifted to the general state and the process is terminated. Further, if it is determined that the preparation RT flag or the quasi-RT flag is ON (= 1), the process is terminated and the RT state is maintained.

[Direction control]
The above is an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various effect operations are controlled by the effect control board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the effect control board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118) based on various commands (information command, output signal) output from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the production mode includes a game completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single production mode), a game performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect that suggests the winning flag (implying effect, notification effect, details will be described later), an effect that informs the payout of medals (it may be an aspect that notifies the payout appearance and the number of payouts). There is. Furthermore, in the single-shot effect mode, there is a push order navigation that teaches an appropriate push order. In push order navigation, an appropriate timing may be taught.

[Suggested production]
The suggestion effect is different from the effect (notification effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, that is, an effect that indirectly informs the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. In other words, a display that expresses a color or the like is performed. The suggestion effect is also performed when the winning flag is not present (that is, when the game is lost). In this case, it is set as an effect of content that is difficult to notice that it is lost (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

[Notification production]
For example, when the winning flag is BB, the notice effect can clearly know which winning combination the player has won in the game, such as “Bonus confirmed!”. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination (because a large amount of medals can be acquired) such as BB and RB that are pleasing to the player. That is, when a player wins BB or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate them.

[Push order navigation]
When the winning combination of any of “AT1” to “AT10” is won during chance RT (ART), an effect of push order navigation is executed. Further, even when the winning combination of any one of “promotion lip 5 + falling lip 5” to “promotion lip 1 + falling lip 1” is duplicated, an effect of push order navigation is executed. When one of the winning combinations “AT1” to “AT10” is won, nine medals are paid out when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an appropriate pressing order according to the effect of the pressing order navigation.

  The flow when winning a winning combination of “AT1” to “AT10” will be described, for example, an effect when winning a winning combination of “AT1”. When the winning combination of “AT1” is won, an order corresponding to an appropriate pressing order is displayed on the image display body 500 as schematically shown in FIG. Specifically, since the proper pressing order is “left → middle → right”, the left decorative character LL representing the number “1” is displayed on the left side of the image display 500, and in the center, A middle decorative character LC representing the number “2” is displayed, and a right decorative character LR representing the character “3” is displayed on the right side.

  Subsequently, when the left reel stop button 211a is operated in accordance with the push order navigation, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the left reel 301a is stopped and the left decorative character LL is erased. Further, when the middle reel stop button 211b is operated in accordance with the push order navigation, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the middle reel 301b is stopped and the middle decorative character LC is erased. Then, when the right reel stop button 211c is operated in accordance with the push order navigation, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the right reel 301c is stopped and the bell symbols are aligned on the right downward line 632a (see FIG. 47). At this time, in the image display body 500, the right decorative character LR is erased and the decorative character “9 GET!” Is displayed. Thus, the player is informed that there are nine payouts due to the winning of the bell.

  On the other hand, in the effect of push order navigation, even if the proper push order for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is taught, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c may not be operated as taught due to the carelessness of the player. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), after the decoration characters LL, LC, and LR, which are proper push orders, are displayed on the image display body 500, as shown in FIG. In contrast, assume that the middle reel stop button 211b has been operated. In this case, a warning is displayed on the image display body 500 as a decorative character “MISS!” To notify the player that a push order error has occurred.

  Thereafter, the left and right reels 301a and 301c are stopped by operating the left and right reel stop buttons 211a and 211c as shown in FIG. At this time, when the left and right reel stop buttons 211a and 211c are operated at an appropriate timing, the two-sheet payout symbol combination and the four-sheet payout symbol combination are respectively displayed on the two effective lines, and “ The decoration letter “6 GET!” Is displayed. On the other hand, when the left and right reel stop buttons 211a and 211c are operated at an improper timing, “bell bumps” are displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (b).

  On the other hand, if the promotion replay and the fall replay are overlapped during ART, when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated in an appropriate push order according to the effect of push order navigation, or part of the pushes If the order is operated in an improper pressing order, ART is maintained. On the other hand, if the entire pushing order is operated in an inappropriate pushing order, the gaming state shifts from ART to quasi-RT.

  Regarding the flow when winning one of the winning roles of “Promotion Lip 5 + Falling Lip 5” to “Promotion Lip 1 + Falling Lip 1”, for example, when the winning combination of “Promotion Lip 5 + Falling Lip 5” is won The production will be described. When the winning combination of “elevation lip 5 + falling lip 5” is won, an order corresponding to an appropriate pressing order is displayed on the image display 500 as schematically shown in FIG. Specifically, since the proper pressing order is “left → middle → right”, the left decorative character LL representing the number “1” is displayed on the left side of the image display 500, and in the center, A middle decorative character LC representing the number “2” is displayed, and a right decorative character LR representing the character “3” is displayed on the right side.

  Subsequently, when the left reel stop button 211a is operated in accordance with the push order navigation, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the left reel 301a is stopped and the left decorative character LL is erased. Further, when the middle reel stop button 211b is operated in accordance with the push order navigation, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the middle reel 301b is stopped and the middle decorative character LC is erased. Then, when the right reel stop button 211c is operated according to the push order navigation, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), the right reel 301c stops and the replay symbols are aligned on the right-up line 632b (see FIG. 47). At this time, in the image display body 500, the right decoration character LR is deleted, and the ART continues.

  On the other hand, in the effect of push order navigation, even if the proper push order for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is taught, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c may not be operated as taught due to the carelessness of the player. For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), after the decoration characters LL, LC, and LR, which are in proper pressing order, are displayed on the image display body 500, as shown in FIG. In contrast, assume that the middle reel stop button 211b has been operated. In this case, a warning is displayed on the image display body 500 as a decorative character “MISS!” To notify the player that a push order error has occurred. At this time, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not operated in an appropriate push order, and some push orders are operated in an incorrect push order or all push orders are operated in an incorrect push order. It becomes.

  Thereafter, when the left and right reel stop buttons 211a and 211c are operated in an inappropriate pressing order, the left and right reels 301a and 301c are stopped and the promotion replay is displayed as shown in FIG. Thus, the gaming state is maintained as ART. At this time, a decorative character “KEEP!” Is displayed on the image display body 500. On the other hand, if the left and right reel stop buttons 211a and 211c are operated in an improper pushing order, the left and right reels 301a and 301c are stopped and a tumble replay is displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (b). Thus, the gaming state shifts (falls) to the quasi-RT. At this time, a decorative character “FALL!” Is displayed on the image display body 500.

[Continuous production]
On the other hand, as a continuous production mode, there are those corresponding to game states such as a general state, a preparation RT, a quasi-RT, a chance RT, and a bonus. These are clarifications about the gaming state, and the player has a chance to determine whether the current gaming state is in preparation RT, for example, by performing these effects (continuous effects). It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is during RT.

  Then, during ART, a continuous effect is executed from the start to the end so that the player can recognize that fact. For example, a display that counts the number of ART games, or a sound effect that gives a sense of crisis as it approaches a specified number of times. In this way, the player can proceed with the game while confirming how many remaining ART games there are.

  The effect modes described above can be executed as image display by the image display body 500, generation of sound effects by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such a production mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues the game for a long time. The production mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, or the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, dolls imitating characters, movable models, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at different positions from each reel, and can be started and stopped regardless of player operations as part of the production. It is also possible to provide various effects by providing illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp). By adopting such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[ART grant lottery]
Further, on the main board 409, an ART grant lottery is executed to shift the gaming state from the general state to the chance RT through the preparation RT. Hereinafter, the ART grant lottery will be described. The ART grant lottery is executed when the gaming state is in the general state, and is executed based on the high and low state and the winning combination (winning small combination) in the general state, or the high and low state and the post-conversion outcome described later. . As the high and low states, a high probability state and a low probability state are provided, and the probability that the high probability state generally shifts to the chance RT is higher than that of the low probability state.

[High and low state]
When the gaming state is a general state, the state is shifted between a high probability state and a low probability state as a high and low state. Further, when in the high probability state, the lottery for transition to the low probability state is executed, and when in the low probability state, the lottery for transition to the high probability state is executed. The transition to the high probability state and the transition lottery to the low probability state are executed based on the winning combination.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the transition probability of the high and low states, and is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 and the like on the main board 409 as the high and low state transition table. As the high / low state transition table, a low probability stay state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 74A and a high probability stay state transition lottery table shown in FIG. 74B are provided.

  The state transition table at the time of low probability stay shown in FIG. 74A is a table that is referred to when the gaming state stays in the low probability state of the general state, and each of the settings 1 to 6 has a high probability. The transition probability to the state is determined. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, when the winning combination is “out of” or “replay”, the probability shifts to a high probability state with a probability of 1/1024, and when the winning combination is “Bell (Bell 1, Bell 2)”, 5 / Transition to a high probability state with a probability of 1024. Also, when the winning combination is “Weak Cherry (Cherry 2)”, it shifts to a high probability state with a probability of 200/1024, and when the winning combination is “Watermelon”, it shifts to a high probability state with a probability of 10/1024. When the winning combination is “strong cherry (cherry 1)”, it shifts to a high probability state with a probability of 20/1024. In the case of setting 2 to setting 6, each shifts to the high probability state with the probability shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, the high probability stay state transition table shown in FIG. 74 (b) is a table that is referred to when the gaming state stays in the high probability state of the general state. Probability of transition to probability state is determined. Specifically, when the winning combination is “out of”, the state shifts to a low probability state with a probability of 50/1024, and when the winning combination is “replay”, the state shifts to a high probability state with a probability of 10/1024. When the winning combination is another combination, the high probability state is maintained.

[Lottery for chance RT]
Further, the main board 409 executes the lottery for the transition to the chance RT based on the current high and low state and the winning combination. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the probability of transition to chance RT, and is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like on the main board 409 as a chance RT transition table. As the chance RT transition table, a low probability stay chance RT transition lottery table shown in FIG. 75A and a high probability stay chance RT transition lottery table shown in FIG. 75B are provided.

  The low probability stay chance RT transition table shown in FIG. 75A is a table that is referred to when the gaming state stays in the low probability state of the general state. The probability of transition to RT (preparation RT) is determined. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, when the winning combination is “out of”, “replay”, or “bell (bell 1, bell 2)”, the chance RT is transferred with a probability of 1/1024, and the winning combination is “weak cherry (cherry) In the case of “2)”, it shifts to chance RT with a probability of 15/1024. Further, when the winning combination is “Watermelon”, the chance RT is transferred with a probability of 50/1024, and when the winning combination is “Strong Cherry (Cherry 1)”, the chance RT is shifted with a probability of 100/1024. Further, in the case of setting 2 to setting 6, each shifts to chance RT with the probability shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, the high probability stay chance RT transition table shown in FIG. 75B is a table that is referred to when the gaming state stays in the high probability state of the general state. The probability of transition to chance RT (preparation RT) is determined for each. Specifically, in the case of setting 1, when the winning combination is “out of” or “replay”, the chance RT is shifted to a chance RT of 1/1024, and when the winning combination is “Bell (Bell 1, Bell 2)”, 2/1024. It shifts to chance RT with the probability of. Further, when the winning combination is “weak cherry (cherry 2)”, the chance RT is transferred with a probability of 30/1024, and when the winning combination is “watermelon”, the opportunity RT is transferred with a probability of 100/1024. Further, when the winning combination is “strong cherry (cherry 1)”, the chance RT is shifted to 200/1024.

  In this way, when the symbol combinations that are likely to shift to the chance RT are arranged in order from the side that is difficult to shift, the order is “loss”, “replay”, “bell”, “weak cherry”, “watermelon”, and “strong cherry”. Therefore, from the viewpoint of “losing”, “replay”, “bell”, “weak cherry”, “watermelon”, and “strong cherry” are all symbol combinations that are easy to shift to the chance RT, and are advantageous symbol combinations for the player. Symbol combinations that are advantageous for these players are determined on the main board 409.

  If these small roles are arranged in the order of the winning probabilities by internal lottery, they are in the order of “losing”, “replay”, “bell”, “weak cherry”, “watermelon”, and “strong cherry”. Therefore, the smaller the winning probability of the internal lottery, the easier it is to shift to the chance RT.

[Outcome conversion control processing]
Next, the output conversion control process will be described. The turn conversion control process is executed by the main board 409, and is executed when the number of ceiling games in the turn conversion period described later is reached. In the outcome conversion control, control for converting the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means into a predetermined symbol combination can be executed. The main board 409 corresponds to symbol conversion control means. When the freeze control is executed, reception of all the operators such as the one-sheet insertion button 205, the MAX insertion button 206, the start lever 210, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c in the slot machine 1 is invalidated.

  While the freeze control is being executed, the main board 409 performs control to rotate the reels 301a to 301c as appropriate to convert the currently displayed output to a predetermined output. In the outcome conversion control, the reels 301a to 301c are rotated to display after the outcome in the previous game of the game for which the outcome conversion control is executed (hereinafter referred to as “previous game outcome”) after being converted by the outcome conversion control. Converted to a predetermined pattern (predetermined symbol combination, hereinafter referred to as “converted output”) and displayed. The post-conversion outcome is determined based on the set value, the number of digested games in the state measured after the end of the chance RT or bonus game, the high or low state, the lottery result executed in a predetermined game (including the previous game), etc. Is done. The procedure for determining the post-conversion items will be described later. By executing the above-described turn conversion control, the number of display of the turn can be made larger than the number of lotteries executed in each game. As a result, the outcomes can be displayed at a rate higher than the lottery probability executed in each game.

  The output conversion control is completed while the freeze control is being executed, and after the freeze timer is set to 0 and the freeze control ends, the reels 301a to 301c start to rotate. After that, as in the case where the freeze control is not executed, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c become effective after the rotation speeds of the reels 301a to 301c become equal.

  A specific movement of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c when the turn conversion control is executed will be briefly described with reference to the drawings. For example, it is assumed that the previous game outcome is “BELL” and the post-conversion outcome is “Watermelon”. In this case, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), for example, “Bell 1 symbol-Bell 1 symbol-Bell 1 symbol” is displayed on the lower right effective line 623a as the previous game outcome, and the previous game is ended.

  Subsequently, in order to start the next game, when the player operates the start lever 210 and the main board 409 detects the operation of the start lever 210, freeze control is executed, and the one-sheet insertion button 205 in the slot machine 1, Reception of all the operators such as the MAX insertion button 206, the start lever 210, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is invalidated. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start rotating with the reception of these operators disabled. The rotation speed at this time is set to be lower than the rotation speed of the reel when the game is being executed. Further, when the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, a decorative character “CHANGE!” Is displayed on the image display body 500 to inform the player that the turn conversion is being executed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the left reel 301a is stopped, and the "watermelon symbol / bell 1 symbol / replay symbol" symbols are stopped and displayed in order from the left reel 301a. At this time, the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c continue to rotate. At this time, the decoration character “COMP?” Is displayed on the image display body 500, and the player is given a sense of expectation that a rare small role or the like is displayed by the output conversion control.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are sequentially stopped, and the symbols “Replay Design / Watermelon Design / Blue 7 Design” are stopped and displayed in order from the top of the middle reel 301b. The symbols “replay symbol / bell 1 symbol / watermelon symbol” are stopped and displayed in order from the top of the right reel 301c. In this way, the symbol combination “watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol”, which is a symbol combination corresponding to the case where the winning combination is watermelon, is displayed on the right-down line 623a. In addition, a decorative character “watermelon GET!” Is displayed on the image display body 500. In this way, the player is informed that the watermelon has been changed.

  The freeze control is continued while the symbol combination “watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol” is displayed on the lower right line 623a, and when the freeze timer times out, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c start rotating. The rotation speeds of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c at this time are the rotation speeds of the reels when the game is being executed. In this way, the output conversion control is executed.

  A gaming machine according to another technical idea of the slot machine 1 having the above-described basic configuration will be described below for reference.

[Reference Technology Thought 1]
A gaming machine that rotates a plurality of movable bodies by performing a lottery regarding a winning combination, stops the plurality of movable bodies that are rotating, and displays a result of the lottery,
When there are a gaming state including at least a normal gaming state and a plurality of advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous than the normal gaming state, when a plurality of transition conditions are satisfied, the gaming state is selected from the plurality of advantageous gaming states. Gaming state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
While the predetermined progress condition that is a part of the plurality of transition conditions is satisfied and the game is progressing, it is possible to satisfy the plurality of transition conditions but the predetermined advantageous game. Advantageous game state control improving means capable of improving the frequency of transition to the advantageous gaming state by enabling transition to a similar gaming state similar to the state;
A gaming machine comprising:

  The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned reference technical concept includes a plurality of gaming states including at least a normal gaming state (general state) and a plurality of advantageous gaming states (pseudo bonus and bonus) that are more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Gaming state control means capable of shifting the gaming state to a predetermined advantageous gaming state (during bonus) of the plurality of advantageous gaming states when the transition conditions (winning bonus combination, display of bonus symbol combination) are satisfied (Main board 409, production control board 510). Further, when the game is progressing while a predetermined transition condition (winning of a predetermined winning combination) that is a part of the plurality of transition conditions is satisfied, the plurality of transition conditions (bonus winning combination) A similar game state similar to the predetermined advantageous game state regardless of whether or not some or all of the plurality of transition conditions are satisfied, while being able to satisfy the winning and bonus symbol combination display) Advantageous game state control improving means (main board 409, effect control board 510) capable of improving the frequency of shifting to the advantageous game state by enabling the transition to the (pseudo bonus).

  In the gaming machine according to the above-mentioned reference technical concept, the gaming state control means (main board 409, production control board 510) satisfies a plurality of transition conditions (winning of a predetermined winning combination, display of a predetermined symbol combination). Sometimes, it can be shifted to a predetermined advantageous gaming state (during bonus). In order to be able to shift to the predetermined advantageous gaming state, a plurality of transition conditions (winning of a predetermined winning combination, display of a predetermined symbol combination) must be satisfied, and there are fewer opportunities to shift to the predetermined advantageous gaming state. It can be considered.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the above-mentioned reference technical idea, the advantageous gaming state control improving means allows the transition to a similar gaming state (pseudo bonus) similar to the predetermined advantageous gaming state, so that the advantageous gaming state is achieved. The frequency of migration can be improved. For this reason, even if it does not shift to the predetermined advantageous gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to a similar gaming state that is similar to the predetermined advantageous gaming state, so that it is possible to increase the opportunities for shifting to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, since the gaming opportunities in the advantageous gaming state can be increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a decrease in the opportunities to play the advantageous gaming state. Furthermore, it can be expressed as the following reference technical idea.

[Reference Technology Thought 2]
A gaming machine that rotates a plurality of movable bodies by performing a lottery regarding a winning combination, stops the plurality of movable bodies that are rotating, and displays a result of the lottery,
When there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state including at least a plurality of advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous than the normal gaming state, when the transferable condition and the transition execution condition as the transition conditions are satisfied, the gaming state is Gaming state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined advantageous gaming state among a plurality of advantageous gaming states;
Transition to a similar advantageous gaming state similar to the predetermined advantageous gaming state while being able to satisfy the transition execution condition when the game is progressing while the transitionable condition is satisfied Advantageous game state control improving means capable of improving the frequency of transition to the advantageous game state,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to this reference technical concept, the gaming state control means displays the gaming state when the transferable condition (bonus winning combination) and the transfer execution condition (display of bonus symbol combination) as the transfer condition are satisfied. It is possible to shift to a predetermined advantageous gaming state (during bonus) among the plurality of advantageous gaming states. In this way, by making the transition condition the transition enable condition and the transition execution condition, it is possible to improve the interest of the process until the transition to the advantageous gaming state.

[Reference Technology Thought 3]
A gaming machine that rotates a plurality of movable bodies by performing a lottery regarding a winning combination, stops the plurality of movable bodies that are rotating, and displays a symbol combination based on the result of the lottery,
A gaming state control means for controlling to a gaming state including at least a normal gaming state and a plurality of advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous than the normal gaming state;
An advantage of shifting a gaming state to a predetermined advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states by selecting a predetermined result as a result of the lottery and displaying a special symbol combination based on the predetermined result. Gaming state transition control means;
A similar advantageous gaming state similar to the predetermined advantageous gaming state while the special symbol combination can be displayed when a game is progressing while a predetermined result is selected as the result of the lottery Advantageous game state control improving means capable of improving the frequency of shifting to the advantageous gaming state by enabling the transition to
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the reference technical idea, the advantageous gaming state transition control means selects a predetermined result as the result of the lottery and displays a special symbol combination based on the predetermined result, thereby displaying the gaming state Is shifted to a predetermined advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states. For this reason, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the transition to the advantageous gaming state. Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the above gaming machine will be further described.

[Game state]
In the slot machine 3 according to the above-mentioned reference technical idea, a general state, ART, inside a first bonus, inside a second bonus, and inside a bonus are prepared as gaming states. These gaming states are controlled by the main board 409. The main board 409 corresponds to game state control means. Further, a pseudo bonus described later is controlled by the main board 409 and the effect control board 510. During the pseudo bonus, the main board 409 executes control equivalent to ART. The effect control board 510 also corresponds to the game state control means.

  In the slot machine 3, when the bonus is won in the general state or inside the bonus, the bonus machine is shifted to the bonus state. If the bonus combination is won when the gaming state is in the general state, the transition to the inside of the first bonus is made, and if the bonus combination is won at the time of the ART, the transfer is made to the inside of the second bonus. To do.

  The main board 409 can display a bonus symbol combination and shift to a bonus when a game is progressing after winning a bonus combination. On the other hand, the main board 409 and the effect control board 510 can shift to a similar pseudo bonus during the bonus regardless of whether the bonus combination is won or not, and improve the frequency of shifting to the advantageous gaming state. The main board 409 and the effect control board 510 correspond to advantageous gaming state control improvement means.

  In the general state, when the ART grant lottery is won, the state shifts to ART. In ART, the number of continued games of ART is determined at the time of transition, and the state transitions to the general state when winning a fall replay. Furthermore, when the number of games is added at the time of ART and the lottery is won, the number of continuing games of ART is added.

[Number of bets]
The slot machine 3 according to the above-mentioned reference technical idea is different from the above-described slot machine 1 in that the player can select the bet number when starting the game. In the slot machine 3, a player can arbitrarily select the number of medals from three or one.

  When the number of medals bet is three and when the number is one, the lottery probability at the time of executing the internal lottery is different. FIG. 79 shows the internal lottery using the winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 78 in the three-bet game in which the bet number of medals is three, and FIG. 79 shows the one-bet game in which the bet number of medals is one. An internal lottery using the winning combination lottery table shown is executed. In both the three-wager game and the one-game game, the expected value of the payout number with respect to the number of inserted medals is negative in the general state and the game state inside the bonus, and as viewed from the player as the game progresses The expected value for paying out medals becomes negative, and the number of medals decreases.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the winning probability for each winning combination in each gaming state is determined for each gaming state. Among these, the condition devices described as “RB” are “RB + Chance Eye”, “RB + Watermelon 2”, “RB + Watermelon 1”, “RB + Cherry 3”, “RB + Cherry 2”, “RB + Cherry 1”. ”And“ RB + Bell ”, which are collectively referred to as“ RB ”. Similarly, for “BB”, “BB + Chance Eye”, “BB + Watermelon 2”, “BB + Watermelon 1”, “BB + Cherry 3”, “BB + Cherry 2”, “RB + Cherry 1”, “BB + Bell” are summarized. "BB".

  Further, in this slot machine 3, three winning combinations “Cherry 3”, “Cherry 2”, and “Cherry 1” are provided as winning combinations related to cherries. “Cherry 3” corresponds to “weak cherry”, and when “Cherry 3” is won, a symbol combination of “cherry”-“ANY”-“ANY” is displayed on either of the effective lines 623a, 623b. It becomes possible. Here, “ANY”-“ANY” is composed of symbols other than “Cherry”-“Cherry”.

  “Cherry 2” corresponds to “Strong Cherry”, and when “Cherry 2” is selected, the symbol combination “Cherry”-“Cherry”-“Cherry” is assigned to one of the effective lines 623a, 623b. Can be displayed. Furthermore, “cherry 1” corresponds to “middle cherry”, and when “cherry 1” is won, a symbol combination in which “cherry” is arranged in the middle of the left reel 301a can be displayed.

  When a winning combination is won as a result of the lottery, the reel stop process is performed so that the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated and the symbol combination based on the activated condition device is displayed on the active line. This is the same configuration as the slot machine 1 described above.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the slot machine 3 is provided with a MAX insertion button 206 and a single sheet insertion button 205. When there are one or more medals (credits) stored, the betting number is set to one by pressing the one-insert button 205 once. In addition, when there are three or more medals stored, pressing the MAX insertion button 206 once reduces the number of bets to three. The game is started by operating the start lever 210 after the number of bets is thus determined.

[Bonus game and pseudo bonus]
In the slot machine 3, a main bonus (BB game) and a pseudo bonus are prepared as an advantageous gaming state. In the process of proceeding with the game, a bonus combination is won by an internal lottery executed on the main board 409, and as shown in FIG. 81, a bonus symbol combination is displayed to shift to the main bonus (BB game). This is the same as the slot machine 1 described above.

  The pseudo bonus is executed by winning a pseudo bonus lottery executed on the effect control board 510. The pseudo bonus lottery is executed using the result information of the internal lottery output from the main board 409 on the effect control board 510 when the gaming state is the general state or ART. The effect control board 510 determines the current gaming state based on the information command output from the main board 409. In the pseudo bonus lottery, ART is easier to win the pseudo bonus lottery than in the general state. The winning ratio of the pseudo bonus is shown in the pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG.

  For example, if the bell is won in the general state, the main board 409 outputs the gaming state and the result of the internal lottery to the effect control board 510 as information commands. On the effect control board 510, a pseudo bonus lottery is executed using the output information. In the output information command, the gaming state is the general state, and the lottery result information command is the bell command. In this case, the pseudo bonus lottery is executed under the condition that the winning probability is 0.01%.

  Here, for example, when the information command of the lottery result of the internal lottery is a bell command, the pseudo bonus lottery is executed with the same probability regardless of whether the game state is the general state or ART. Further, when the information command of the lottery result of the internal lottery is the cherry 2 command, the pseudo bonus lottery is executed with a higher winning probability when the game state is ART than the general state. Thus, as a whole, the probability of shifting to the pseudo bonus is higher in the ART than in the general state. In addition, when symbol conversion is executed after the internal lottery is executed, the result displayed after the symbol conversion is executed is replaced with the lottery result, and the pseudo bonus lottery is executed using the displayed outcome. To do. The symbol conversion control will be described later.

  In order to shift to the pseudo bonus, as shown in FIG. 82, a line connecting the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel 301c (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo effective line”) is set to “blue 7 "-" Blue 7 "-" Blue 7 "symbol combination (hereinafter referred to as" pseudo bonus symbol combination ") is stopped and displayed.

  When the special replay is won when the pseudo bonus lottery is won, a push order navigation for aligning the special replay is displayed on the image display body 500. Special replay is always established in duplicate with normal replay. When the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated in the push order by the push order navigation, the special replay is won and the reels in the other push orders. When the stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated, the normal replay is won. Then, one symbol combination of special replay becomes a pseudo bonus symbol combination.

  When the pseudo bonus symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the pseudo effective line, the pseudo bonus is executed. In the pseudo bonus, the symbol combination of “blue 7”-“blue 7”-“blue 7” is stopped and displayed on the pseudo effective line, and a predetermined symbol combination for winning a special replay is displayed on the effective lines 623a and 623b. Transitions by displaying a stop.

  During the pseudo bonus, the main board 409 executes an internal lottery with the same winning probability as the ART. On the other hand, in the production control board 510, when the information command indicating the result of the internal lottery is output from the main board 409, if the output information command is any one of “AT10” to “AT1”, an appropriate Execute push order navigation that teaches the push order. The slot machine 3 executes push order navigation that teaches an appropriate push order even during the bonus.

  Both the bonus and the pseudo bonus are managed by the maximum payout number. Specifically, when the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number, for example, 306, the bonus and the pseudo bonus are ended. When the bonus and the pseudo bonus are finished, the game state before the transition to the real bonus and the pseudo bonus is returned in principle. In addition, RB of this bonus is complete | finished when the payout number exceeds 112 sheets.

  Also, during the bonus transition from the general state, the ART transition lottery is executed. When the ART transition lottery is won, the ART transitions to the ART without returning to the general state after the bonus is completed. Transition. During the bonus transferred from ART, an extra lottery is executed instead of the ART shift lottery. In the extra lottery, the number of extra games at the time of winning is determined by lottery. Here, when the winning lottery is won, the number of won games is added to the ART game.

[Design conversion control]
In the main board 409, when executing the internal lottery, the symbol conversion lottery is performed simultaneously with the internal lottery. When the symbol conversion lottery is won, symbol conversion is executed. The symbol conversion lottery is executed when the result of the internal lottery is “out of combination”, “bell combination”, “AT10” to “AT1”. When the symbol conversion lottery is won, symbol conversion control is executed. In the symbol conversion control, after the result of the internal lottery is displayed in the symbol display window 401, the freeze control similar to the above-described item conversion control is executed, and while the freeze control is being executed, the reel 301a on the main board 409 is executed. , 301b, 301c are appropriately rotated to convert the displayed symbols. In the symbol conversion control, the freeze time is determined by lottery, and the number of symbol conversions is determined based on the determined freeze time.

  Next, a procedure for a game in the slot machine 3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83A, when the start lever 210 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate. At this time, in the main board 409, an internal lottery is executed and the winning combination is determined. In addition, a character is displayed on the image display body 500, and a predetermined effect is executed.

  Subsequently, when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, and symbol combinations are displayed. Then, the privilege according to the displayed symbol combination is provided. Benefits here include payout of medals and transition of gaming state.

  Further, for example, when “Cherry 2” is won as a winning combination, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), by operating the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c within a range in which the “Cherry design” can be drawn. The symbol combination of “cherry”-“cherry”-“cherry” (hereinafter referred to as “strong cherry symbol combination”) is displayed on the right-upward effective line 623b. When “Cherry 2” is won, there is a possibility that the bonus combination is also won. For this reason, when the strong cherry symbol combination is displayed, the expectation for the bonus game to be given to the player can be increased.

  By displaying the strong cherry symbol combination, the expectation of the transition to the bonus game is increased, and the image display body 500 displays the decorative character “CHANCE!” And also displays the movement of the character that assumes a chance. This further raises expectations for bonus games.

  Then, in the case where the bonus combination is not won and won, a predetermined effect by the character is executed as shown in FIG. 83 (a). On the other hand, if the bonus combination is won in duplicate, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), the decorative character “BONUS confirmed!” Is displayed on the image display body 500, and the bonus combination is selected. To the player.

  After notifying the bonus confirmation, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the image display 500 is displayed with the characters "It's one!" And "Press the back 1 BET button 1" A decorative character is displayed to prompt the start of the game by multiplying by one with one medal bet. At this time, the betting number of medals can be reduced to 1 by pressing the 1-sheet insertion button 205. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the image display 500 prompts the operation of the one-sheet insertion button. However, in order to set the number of medals bet to one by pressing the one-sheet insertion button, it is necessary that the number of stored medals is one or more. Can also prompt the user to insert a single medal and start the game.

  After winning the bonus combination, the bonus flag is established, and the bonus flag is established until the bonus symbol combination is displayed. The state in which the bonus flag is established and the bonus symbol combination is possible continues until the bonus symbol combination is displayed. If the game is continued with the bonus flag established, and if you have won “Replay”, “Bell”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, etc. in the internal lottery, the symbols corresponding to these winners Combinations can be displayed preferentially. In addition, when the “bonus combination” and “outage combination” are won in the internal lottery, the bonus symbol combination can be displayed.

  Here, in both the three-ply game and the single-ply game, the state where the number of medals decreases as viewed from the player continues, but the reduction rate of the three-ply game is lower than that of the single-ply game. Furthermore, taking into consideration the winning rate of bonus combination and the rate of transition to ART, when the bonus flag is not established, the expected value for paying out medals is greater in the 3-game game than in the 1-game game. For this reason, from the viewpoint of the player, there is a higher possibility that the number of medals that can be obtained in the three-ply game is larger than that in the single-ply game.

  On the other hand, after the bonus flag is established, in order to suppress the decrease in medals, the decrease in medals can be prevented by displaying the bonus symbol combination and shifting to the bonus game. After the bonus flag is established, the bonus symbol combination can be displayed in either a three-ply game or a single-ply game, so the single-pick one that consumes less (betting number) However, the decrease in medals from the player's point of view is reduced.

  Therefore, in order to prompt the player to play a single game, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), an effect for prompting the single betting game is displayed on the symbol display body 500. In this way, it is possible to reduce the player's loss during the repeatedly executed game. As a result, a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Thereafter, when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed once or one medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 203 and a game with one medal is started, as shown in FIG. , "I'm in the tone! Next, I'm aiming for Blue 7!" In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement that the game start operation by the single-ply, which is the game operation as displayed on the image display body 500, has been executed.

  Then, when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), “blue 7” − “blue” is displayed on the right downward line 623a in the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. The symbol combination of “7”-“Blue 7” is displayed. Then, the game shifts to a bonus game.

  The bonus game can be executed only by multiplying three, and the winning combination is drawn by referring to the winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. In the process of executing the bonus game, if the winning combination is any one of AT10 to AT1, the presentation control board 510 displays a push order navigation for navigating an appropriate push order as the image display body 500 or a predetermined Run by ramp.

[Pseudo Bonus]
If “strong cherry 2” is won, a bonus bonus lottery is performed in addition to the case where the bonus combination is won. When this pseudo bonus lottery is won, the game shifts to a pseudo bonus on condition that a chance replay is won. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when a strong cherry symbol combination is displayed on the right-up line 623a, there is a possibility of shifting to a pseudo bonus. The flow at this time will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the strong cherry symbol combination is displayed on the right rising line 623a and the bonus combination is not won, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the image display 500 is displayed. , "Sorry!" Decoration characters are displayed. When the start lever 205 is operated to start the next game from this state, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

  Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 87A, a decorative character “Aim for Blue 7!” Is displayed on the image display body 500. Subsequently, by operating the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c within a range where blue 7 can be pulled in, as shown in FIG. 87B, the pseudo bonus symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the pseudo effective line.

  When the pseudo bonus is executed, the gaming state shifts to ART. In the process of executing the pseudo bonus, if the winning combination is any one of AT10 to AT1, the presentation control board 510 displays a push order navigation for navigating an appropriate push order as the image display body 500 or a predetermined Run by ramp.

  The gaming state when the pseudo bonus is executed is ART. As shown in FIG. 78, when the winning probability of each winning combination of ART is compared with each winning combination in the bonus, the winning probabilities other than “BB”, “RB”, and “out” are common. When “BB” and “RB” are won, the number of medals paid out is 0. Therefore, the expected value of medals to be paid out is common between the pseudo bonus and the bonus. Thus, the pseudo bonus is very similar to the bonus that shifts by winning BB.

  The bonus is transferred by winning BB as a winning combination. However, if the BB is not won as a winning combination, the bonus is not transferred. Now, whether or not to win BB is determined by an internal lottery executed with reference to the winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 78 or FIG.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 3, it is possible to shift to a pseudo bonus similar to that during the bonus other than during the bones. For this reason, even if the transition is not performed during the bonus, there is a possibility of transition to a similar pseudo bonus during the bonus, so that it is possible to increase the opportunities for transition to an advantageous gaming state such as a bonus. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to less opportunities to play the advantageous gaming state.

  Further, although an example in which a bonus combination is won during the general state is described here, a bonus combination may be won during ART. If the ART game is progressed in the state where the bonus combination is won, it is already possible to shift to the bonus game. It will be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, even when the ART game is won as a bonus combination during ART, it is possible to shift to the bonus game at an early stage by displaying an effect for prompting a single betting game on the image display body 500.

  In this way, when a bonus combination is won during ART, it is not necessary to promptly advance a one-game betting game and shift to a bonus game early, but to prompt a single-game until the ART game ends. Alternatively, the transition to the bonus game can be notified when the ART game is finished. Alternatively, it is possible to use both a case where a single-game game is promoted during ART and a transition to a bonus game is made early, and a case where a transition to a bonus game is notified in the final game of the ART game. Also, during the second bonus, the subtraction of the number of ART games can be stopped.

  Further, during the ART game, the pseudo bonus may not be won, or the pseudo bonus may be won. When the pseudo bonus is won during ART, the subtraction of the ART game can be stopped during the pseudo bonus, or the subtraction of the ART game can be continued. When the subtraction of the ART game is stopped during the pseudo bonus, for example, during the pseudo bonus, the extra probability due to the addition of the number of games can be made higher than the case other than the pseudo bonus.

[Progress of symbol conversion]
The slot machine 3 executes symbol conversion control when the symbol conversion lottery is won. In the symbol conversion control, the freeze time is determined by lottery, and the number of symbol conversions is determined according to the determined freeze time. There are four types of freeze times: 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 12 seconds, and 15 seconds. When winning the symbol conversion lottery, 4 seconds are determined at 6549/8192, and 8 seconds are determined at 1634/8192. Moreover, 12 seconds is determined by 8/8192, and 15 seconds is determined by 1/8192.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 88, when the freeze time is 4 seconds, the number of conversions is 1, and a weak cherry symbol combination corresponding to “Cherry 3” is displayed in the symbol display window 401. When the freeze time is 8 seconds, the number of conversions is 2, and the symbol display window 401 displays a strong cherry symbol combination corresponding to “Cherry 2”. Further, when the freeze time is 12 seconds, the number of conversions is 3, and the symbol display window 401 displays the middle cherry symbol combination corresponding to “Cherry 1”. When the freeze time is 4 seconds, the number of conversions is 4, and the symbol display window 401 displays a bonus symbol combination corresponding to “bonus combination” or a bonus recall symbol combination that recalls a bonus symbol combination. . Here, the bonus recall symbol combination is “blue 7”-“blue 7”-“blue 7” while the bonus recall symbol combination is “red 7”-“red 7”. -"Red 7".

  When 4 seconds is determined as the freeze time and the symbol conversion control is executed, the symbol display window 401 displays the off-combination symbol combination corresponding to the “off-role combination” or the bell combination symbol combination corresponding to the “bell role”. ing. For example, if the symbol conversion lottery is won when the winning combination is won, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the freeze symbol combination is displayed and then freeze control is executed. At this time, the left reel 301a moves up and down so as to shake, suggesting that the left reel 301a starts to move. Further, in the image display body 500, the player is focused on the reel 301 a that is moving up and down by displaying decorative characters such that the character says “That ??” or “Wobbling?”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the left reel 301a rotates, and the left reel 301a stops at the position where the cherry symbol is displayed in the lower stage of the left reel 301a. Thus, the weak cherry symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display window 401. At this time, the display character 500 is displayed on the image display 500 so that the character says “Ah !? Changed !?”. In this way, the player is informed that the symbol conversion has been executed.

  Further, when the symbol conversion control is executed with 8 seconds determined as the freeze time, for example, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), after the off symbol combination is displayed, 4 seconds is determined as the freeze time. The left reel 301a rotates in the same manner as in the case described above, and the cherry symbol stops at the lower stage as shown in FIG. 89 (b). From this state, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c move up and down so as to shake, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are likely to start moving. In addition, the image display 500 displays a decorative character such that the character makes a remark “Eh?

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are rotated, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are displayed at positions where cherry symbols are displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 301b and the upper stage of the right reel 301c. Stops. Thus, strong is displayed in the symbol display window 401. At this time, in the image display body 500, the decorative character is displayed so that the character makes a remark “Eh !?” or “Strong cherry !?”. In this way, the player is informed that the symbol conversion has been executed.

  Furthermore, when the symbol conversion control is executed with 12 seconds determined as the freeze time, after the strong cherry symbol combination is displayed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c rotate up and down and rotate to the symbol display window 401. The middle cherry pattern combination is displayed. When 15 seconds is determined as the freeze time and the symbol conversion control is executed, as shown in FIG. 91A, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c move up and down, and the reels 301a, 301b, 301c start moving. Suggest. At this time, decorative characters are displayed on the image display body 500 so as to make a remark saying “not finished ...” “how far ...”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c rotate, and the bonus recall symbol “red 7” — “red 7” — “red 7” is placed in the middle of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c. The combination is displayed in the middle line. At this time, in the image display 500, the decorative character is displayed so that the character makes a remark “Wow !?” or “Great! In this way, the player is informed that the symbol conversion has been executed.

  Based on the symbol combination displayed after symbol conversion is executed, a pseudo bonus lottery with reference to the pseudo bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 80 is executed. For this reason, when the symbol conversion is executed three times and the middle-stage cherry symbol combination is displayed, the winning of the pseudo bonus lottery is confirmed. In addition, when the symbol conversion is executed four times with a freeze time of 15 seconds, three pseudo bonuses are executed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 3 described above, when a plurality of transition conditions that a bonus combination is won and a bonus symbol combination is displayed are satisfied, the gaming state is one of the advantageous gaming states. Migrate to However, in order to shift to a bonus, it is conceivable that a plurality of transition conditions of winning a bonus combination and displaying a bonus symbol combination are satisfied, and there are fewer opportunities to shift into the bonus. In particular, the winning of the bonus combination must be lowered due to the relationship of the payout rate and the transition condition becomes difficult. For this reason, there is a possibility that there will be fewer opportunities to move into the bonus.

  However, in the slot machine 3, it is possible to shift to a pseudo bonus similar to that in the bonus. For this reason, it is possible to shift to a similar pseudo bonus in the bonus without satisfying a plurality of transition conditions, and in particular, without winning a bonus combination, so that it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift to the advantageous gaming state. . Therefore, since the gaming opportunities in the advantageous gaming state can be increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a decrease in the opportunities to play the advantageous gaming state.

  Further, when the symbol conversion control is executed, the control is performed such that the longer the freeze time, the greater the degree of expectation that the privilege of shifting to the pseudo bonus is given, and this is an expectation improvement means. For this reason, as the freeze time elapses, the expectation of the transition to the pseudo bonus can be increased step by step. Furthermore, a transition lottery to a pseudo bonus is executed for each symbol combination that is shifted in stages and displayed in a pseudo manner. For this reason, it is possible to further increase the opportunity for granting the privilege of shifting to the pseudo bonus.

  The above is one form of the slot machine 3 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. For example, in the slot machine 3 described above, the lottery between the main bonus and the pseudo bonus is executed independently, but the winning ratio of the main bonus and the pseudo bonus is adjusted to adjust the winning probability of the pseudo bonus or the main bonus. It is also possible to provide a bonus probability adjusting means. For example, when the design value of the winning probability of this bonus is fixed, and the actual value of the winning probability or winning probability of this bonus is not equal to or greater than a certain probability threshold, the transition to the pseudo bonus The probability can be increased. Specifically, for example, when the design value of the winning probability of the bonus is 1/300 and the actual value of the winning probability or winning probability of the bonus is 1/1000 or less, the bonus is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. Or the probability of transition to a pseudo bonus can be increased. Thus, by adjusting the probability of transition to the bonus (advantageous gaming state), it is possible to suitably suppress the transition to the bonus.

  At this time, as the difference between the design value of the winning probability of the bonus and the actual value of the winning probability, or the actual value of the winning probability is larger, the transition probability to the pseudo bonus can be increased. In this case, the sum of the actual value of the transition probability to the real bonus or the pseudo bonus can be brought close to the sum of the design value of the transition probability to the real bonus or the pseudo bonus. Can be converged to the design value and can function as a probability convergence means.

  Furthermore, the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus can be made higher than the winning probability (transition probability) of the bonus. Generally, in the case of this bonus, since the player can be given a greater sense of executing the bonus, the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus is higher than the winning probability (transition probability) of this bonus. By doing so, the satisfaction given to the player can be increased.

  In order to make the winning probability (transition probability) of this bonus higher than the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus, the winning probability (transition probability) of the bonus is adjusted by adjusting the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus. Can be lower. Or, conversely, the winning probability (transition probability) of the bonus can be adjusted to be higher than the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus.

  Further, in the slot machine 3 described above, a procedure for executing one piece is taught as a procedure for displaying a bonus symbol combination in a manner in which the benefit obtained for the multiplier is the best. On the other hand, it is also possible to execute a teaching that suggests a single sheet. It is also possible to leave several game intervals before executing the teaching of one sheet. In this case, the player can be given a sense of expectation as to whether or not the bonus has been won.

  Furthermore, the number of times of playing a game with one piece is counted when teaching one piece, and when the number of games according to the teaching exceeds a predetermined number, or the number of times of execution of teaching with respect to the number of teachings When the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of exaltation. By executing such an effect that gives an uplifting feeling, it is possible to prompt the player to execute the effect according to the teaching.

  Alternatively, it is possible to execute an effect according to the number of games according to the teaching or the proportion of execution of the teaching. For example, a player who executes a game with one game every time there is a single game instruction is considered to be a player who has been playing a game in the slot machine 3 for a long period or frequently, so he appreciates the execution of the game. The effect shown can be executed. On the other hand, a player who does not often execute a single-game game according to the teaching can execute an effect that teaches that the game is slightly damaged.

  Further, in the slot machine 3 described above, the appearance rate of freeze control is constant regardless of the situation, but the appearance probability of freeze control can also be adjusted. At this time, as the appearance probability of the freeze control, the appearance probability of the freeze control can be lowered as the appearance record of the freeze control increases. If freeze control is executed many times, the operation acceptance suspension period due to freeze control becomes longer, which may hinder smooth progress of the game. At this time, the more the number of freeze control appearances, the lower the occurrence probability of the freeze control, thereby facilitating the smooth control of the game and the game progress smoothing means.

  Furthermore, when the appearance probability of the freeze is adjusted, the probability that the freeze probability returns to the original can be the same regardless of the probability of the freeze. For example, it is possible to execute a game while maintaining a sense of tension by making the freeze probability return to the original value between 10 relatively short games.

  With respect to the slot machines 1 and 3 having the above basic configuration, the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described focusing on the characteristic configuration and operation. The slot machine according to the present invention can be expressed as the following technical idea.

[Technology 1]
A gaming machine that executes a lottery of a winning combination to rotate a plurality of movable bodies, stops the plurality of rotating movable bodies, and displays a result of the lottery,
A profit granting state control means for controlling a profit granting state in which a profit is given to the player;
An end display means for displaying profit granting state end information indicating the end of the profit granting state when controlled to the profit granting state by the profit granting state control means;
When a game progress interruption situation occurs in which the display by the end display means is interrupted, an end information recovery display means for restarting the display by the end display means when the game progress interruption situation is resolved,
When the game progress interruption situation occurs when the profit grant state end information is displayed by the end display means, and the game progress interruption situation is resolved, the profit grant state end information is displayed by the end information recovery display means. Buffer display means that can relieve the feeling of loneliness due to the end of the profit granting state by displaying information other than the end of the profit granting state and restarting display by the end display means
A gaming machine comprising:

  The gaming machine according to the above technical idea 1 includes a profit granting state control means (main board 409, effect control board 10) for controlling a profit granting state (initial game number determination game) in which a profit is given to the player, and a profit End control means (image display body 500) for displaying profit grant status end information indicating the end of the profit grant status when the grant status control means controls the profit grant status. Further, when a game progress interruption situation (power interruption or the like) in which the display by the end display means is interrupted occurs, an end information recovery display means for restarting the display by the end display means when the game progress interruption situation is resolved (Image display 500). Further, when the game progress interruption situation occurs when the profit granting state end information is displayed by the end display means, and the game progress interruption situation is resolved, the profit different from the profit granting state end information by the end information recovery display means A buffer display unit (image display body 500) that can relieve the feeling of loneliness due to the end of the profit granting state by displaying the information outside the granting state and restarting the display by the end displaying unit.

  Since the player is in a profitable state while being controlled in the profit granting state, the player can feel lonely when the profit granting state ends and the profit granting state end information is displayed. Here, if the game progress interruption situation occurs when the profit granting state end information is displayed and the game progress interruption situation is resolved, the player is disgusted when the profit granting state end information is displayed again. There is a risk of giving.

  In this respect, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, when the game progress interruption situation occurs when the profit grant state end information is displayed by the end display means, and the game progress interruption situation is resolved, the profit grant state The profit giving state non-end information different from the end information is displayed and the display by the end display means is resumed. For this reason, since the profit granting state end information is displayed instead of the profit granting state end information, the player does not have to look at the profit granting state end information again. Therefore, a reduction in interest can be suppressed by reducing a sense of disgust due to an opportunity to show a screen in which a state where a profit is granted is finished and reducing a feeling of loneliness.

[Technology 2]
A gaming machine that executes a lottery of a winning combination to rotate a plurality of movable bodies, stops the plurality of rotating movable bodies, and displays a result of the lottery,
A profit granting state control means for controlling a profit granting state in which a profit is given to the player;
After the control of the profit grant state by the profit grant state control means is finished, the heterogeneous profit grant state control means for controlling the heterogeneous profit grant state in which the heterogeneous profit different from the profit is given to the player,
An end display means for displaying profit granting state end information indicating the end of the profit granting state when controlled to the profit granting state by the profit granting state control means;
Start display means for displaying heterogeneous profit granting state start information indicating the start of control of the heterogeneous profit granting state by the heterogeneous profit granting state control means;
When a game progress interruption situation occurs, recovery display means for restarting the display when the game progress interruption situation is resolved,
When the game progress interruption situation occurs when the profit granting state end information is displayed by the end display means, and when the game progress interruption situation is resolved, the recovery display means gives the heterogeneous profit by the start display means. Buffer display means that can relieve loneliness due to the end of the profit granting state by displaying state start information and restarting display;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to this technical idea, after the control of the profit granting state (initial game number determination game) by the profit granting state control unit is finished, the heterogeneous profit granting state (ART game state) of the heterogeneous profit granting state control unit is changed. Control begins. Here, when the game progress interruption situation occurs when the profit granting state end information is displayed and the game progress interruption situation is resolved, the heterogeneous profit granting state start information is displayed by the start display means by the recovery display means. To resume display. For this reason, since the profit granting state end information is not displayed again, the player does not have to look at the profit granting state end information again. Therefore, a reduction in interest can be suppressed by reducing a sense of disgust due to an opportunity to show a screen in which the state where the profit is given is finished. Furthermore, since the heterogeneous profit granting state start information is displayed after the profit granting state has ended, but control by the heterogeneous profit granting state control means is displayed, the player expects the acquisition of the heterogeneous profit by the heterogeneous profit granting state. Can be remembered. Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the gaming machine will be further described focusing on the differences from the slot machines 1 and 3 described above.

[Direction button]
As shown in FIG. 92, the slot machine 5 according to the present embodiment is different from the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 3 in that an effect button 800 is provided. The effect button 800 is operated before the start lever 210 is operated and before the game is started or after the start lever 210 is operated and the game is started, so that the image display body 500 and the reels 301a and 301b are operated. , 301c, etc., the effect of the effect performed. The operation time of the effect button 800 and the effect according to the operation will be described later.

[Design of each reel, design row]
As shown in FIG. 93, in each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c in the slot machine 5 according to the present embodiment, a symbol string (from array number 0) is formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (symbol band) on which a total of 21 symbols (up to 20th) are written is attached. FIG. 93 shows a state in which the symbol rows shown on the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience.

  Each reel 301a, 301b, 301c is arranged so as to be visible through a predetermined number (for example, three) of symbol display windows 401 among symbols arranged in each symbol row. ing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93, the types of symbols are “7” symbol painted in red (first reel arrangement number 1 etc., hereinafter referred to as “7 symbol”), “BAR symbol”, “Cherry” There are “Cherry design”, “Replay design”, “Bell design”, “Watermelon design”, and a design with a star mark (hereinafter referred to as “star design”).

  In FIG. 93, “7 symbols” are two for array numbers 1 and 3 for the reel band 321a, one for array number 2 for the reel band 321b, and one for array number 1 and 3 for the reel band 321c. Two of the numbers correspond. The “BAR symbol” corresponds to one of array number 15 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 18 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 19 in the reel band 321c. “Cherry design” is one of array number 14 in the reel band 321a, six of array numbers 1, 3, 6, 9, 12, 17 in the reel band 321b. In the case of 321c, four of array numbers 6, 9, 14, and 17 correspond. The “replay symbols” are five in the reel band 321a: array numbers 2, 6, 11, 16, 19 and array numbers 0, 5, 8, 8, 11 in the reel band 321b. No. 5 and reel band 321c correspond to five of array number No. 4, No. 7, No. 10, No. 15, and No. 20. The “bell design” has five arrangement numbers 4, 7, 12, 17, 20 in the reel band 321a, and arrangement numbers 4, 7, 10, 15, 15 in the reel band 321b. Five of No. 20 and five of array numbers No. 2, No. 5, No. 8, No. 13, and No. 18 correspond to the reel band 321c. "Watermelon design" has six of array numbers 0, 5, 8, 10, 13, 13, and 18 on reel band 321a, and array numbers 14 and 19 on reel band 321b. In the reel band 321c, there are three arrangement numbers 0, 11, and 16. The “star symbol” corresponds to one of array number 9 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 13 in the reel band 321b, and one of array number 12 in the reel band 321c. In addition, the kind of design is an example, Comprising: It is not restricted to these kinds.

[Winning roles and symbol combinations]
The slot machine 5 differs from the slot machine 1 in the type of winning combination and the winning probability of the winning combination. The winning combination (winning combination) and the corresponding combination of symbols will be described below. FIGS. 94 and 95 show the winning probabilities for each winning combination of the slot machine 5, and are stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like as a winning value determination table. In the slot machine 5, as with the slot machine 3 described above, a one-shot game and a three-game can be executed. The winning probability of the winning combination is different between these one-sheet games and three-game games. Further, in the slot machine 5, the same bonus game and pseudo bonus game as those in the slot machine 3 can be executed.

  When the number of medals bet is three and when the number is one, the lottery probability at the time of executing the internal lottery is different. In the three-bet game in which the bet number of medals is three, an internal lottery using the winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 94 is executed, and in the one-bet game in which the bet number of medals is one, FIG. An internal lottery using the winning combination lottery table shown is executed. In both the three-wager game and the one-game game, the expected value of the payout number with respect to the number of inserted medals is negative in the general state and the game state inside the bonus, and as viewed from the player as the game progresses The expected value for paying out medals becomes negative, and the number of medals decreases. In addition, the rate at which medals decrease is higher in the 3-game game than in the 1-game game.

  The winning probability for each winning combination in each gaming state is determined for each gaming state as shown in FIGS. Among these, the condition devices described as “RB” are “RB + Chance Eye”, “RB + Watermelon 2”, “RB + Watermelon 1”, “RB + Cherry 3”, “RB + Cherry 2”, “RB + Cherry 1”. ”And“ RB + Bell ”, which are collectively referred to as“ RB ”. Similarly, for “BB”, “BB + Chance Eye”, “BB + Watermelon 2”, “BB + Watermelon 1”, “BB + Cherry 3”, “BB + Cherry 2”, “RB + Cherry 1”, “BB + Bell” are summarized. "BB".

  Further, in this slot machine 5, three winning combinations of “Cherry 3”, “Cherry 2”, and “Cherry 1” are provided as winning combinations related to cherries. “Cherry 3” corresponds to “weak cherry”, and when “Cherry 3” is won, a symbol combination of “cherry”-“ANY”-“ANY” is displayed on either of the effective lines 623a, 623b. It becomes possible. Here, “ANY”-“ANY” is composed of symbols other than “Cherry”-“Cherry”.

  “Cherry 2” corresponds to “Strong Cherry”, and when “Cherry 2” is selected, the symbol combination “Cherry”-“Cherry”-“Cherry” is assigned to one of the effective lines 623a, 623b. Can be displayed. Furthermore, “cherry 1” corresponds to “middle cherry”, and when “cherry 1” is won, a symbol combination in which “cherry” is arranged in the middle of the left reel 301a can be displayed.

  “7-match replay” always wins in duplicate with “normal replay”. If the stop order of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is “right → middle → left” when “seven-match replay” is won, the middle stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the middle stage of the right reel 301c are connected. A symbol combination of “7”-“7”-“7” can be displayed on a line (hereinafter referred to as “specific line”). Furthermore, when the “Star-matched replay” is selected and the stop order of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is “right → middle → left”, the symbol combination “star”-“star”-“star” is displayed on the specific line. It can be displayed. Furthermore, when the “Star Mismatch Play” is selected and the stop order of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is “Right → Middle → Left”, the symbol combination “Watermelon”-“Star”-“Star” is displayed on a specific line. Can be displayed.

  When a winning combination is won as a result of the lottery, the reel stop process is performed so that the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated and the symbol combination based on the activated condition device is displayed on the active line. This is the same configuration as the slot machine 1 described above.

[ART transfer lottery]
In the slot machine 5, the gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state when a predetermined ART transition condition is satisfied in the general state and the bonus. In the ART gaming state, as shown in FIG. 94, the winning probability of loss is set to be significantly lower than that in the general state. Further, in the ART gaming state, push order navigation is executed. Therefore, if any one of “AT10” to “AT1” is won, it is possible to win a bell in the correct push order. For this reason, in the ART gaming state, the expected value of the payout number with respect to the number of inserted medals is positive on the condition that the push order navigation is followed, and the expected value of the medal payout as viewed from the player as the game progresses Becomes positive, and medals increase.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an ART transfer lottery table. In the ART transition lottery table, conditions for transitioning to the ART gaming state from the general state, during BB, and during RB are defined. When a predetermined small combination (special combination) is established in the general state, BB, or RB, the ART transfer lottery is won with the probability shown in FIG. After winning by the ART transfer lottery, the ART transfer condition is satisfied by satisfying a predetermined condition, for example, digestion of a predetermined number of precursor games, and the state shifts to the ART gaming state.

  In the case of the general state, if 7 replays are won, the game moves to the ART gaming state with a probability of 1%. In addition, 0.01% when winning the bell, 0.39% when winning the cherry 3, 25% when winning the cherry 2, and 100% probability when winning the cherry 1 Migrate to Furthermore, it shifts to the ART gaming state at 1.25% when winning the watermelon 2, 6.75% when winning the watermelon 1, and 12.5% when winning the chance.

  In the case of BB, if 7 replays are won, the game moves to the ART gaming state with a probability of 100%. In addition, 0.01% when winning the bell, 0.39% when winning the cherry 3, 25% when winning the cherry 2, and 100% probability when winning the cherry 1 Migrate to Furthermore, it shifts to the ART gaming state at 1.25% when winning the watermelon 2, 6.75% when winning the watermelon 1, and 12.5% when winning the chance.

  In case of RB, if you win the bell. The player enters the ART gaming state with a probability of 01%, 3.9% when winning Cherry 3, 50% when winning Cherry 2, and 100% when winning Cherry 1. Furthermore, it shifts to the ART gaming state at 12.5% when winning the watermelon 2, 38.0% when winning the watermelon 1, and 62.5% when winning the chance.

  When the ART transfer lottery is won in the general state, a precursor game number determination lottery is performed using a precursor game number table (not shown). Here, the number of precursor games of 1 to 32 games is determined. When the number of precursor games is determined, the game state shifts from the general state to the ART gaming state after the determined number of precursor games. In the general state, the ART transfer condition is established by winning the ART transfer lottery and digesting the number of precursor games.

  When the ART transfer lottery is won during BB, the game shifts to the ART gaming state after the BB game is over after the determined maximum payout number has been paid. In addition, after the BB game is over, it is possible to shift to the general state once, and then shift to the ART gaming state on condition that a predetermined condition, for example, a bell bump is displayed. In the case of BB, the ART transfer condition is established by winning the ART transfer lottery and displaying the bell bumps.

  If the ART transfer lottery is won during RB, after 30 games are consumed, the state is shifted to the ART state. Here, the main board 409 is. The number of RB games is defined as 30 games. The main board 409 determines the number of games as a continuation permission condition in RB, and becomes an advantageous gaming state continuation permission condition determination means. In addition, when transitioning from RB to ART gaming state, the number of remaining games (remaining game number) when the transition to ART gaming state is determined during RB remains unchanged or the number of remaining games is further increased. And add it to the remaining number of ART games. In addition, when transitioning to the ART gaming state from RB, it is possible to transition to the ART gaming state from the game next to the game determined to transition to the ART gaming state, or after digesting the prescribed number of RB games. It is also possible to shift to the ART gaming state.

[Position conversion control]
In the slot machine 5, small combination conversion control is executed. The small part conversion control is executed by the same control as the symbol conversion control executed in the slot machine 3 described above. Further, in the slot machine 5, when winning the star-matched replay, it shifts to the small role probability changing state for the predetermined number of games thereafter. The small role probability change state is a state that is executed in any one of the general state, BB, RB, and ART gaming state, and compared with the state that is not in the small role probability change state (small role normal state). The occurrence probability of the symbol conversion control is increased. A star-matched replay will always win in duplicate with a normal replay. Then, when reverse pressing is performed with the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c as “right → middle → left”, a star symbol replay is won and a star symbol replay symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display window 401. The When the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are operated in a pressing order other than reverse pressing, a symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed on the symbol display window 401 after winning the normal replay.

  The symbol conversion control is executed when the symbol conversion lottery is won, but the winning probability of the symbol conversion lottery is increased in the small role probability changing state in the small role conversion control. The small role probability change state in the small role probability change control is shown in the small role probability change continued game number lottery table shown in FIG. 97 (a), the small role probability change conversion magnification lottery table shown in FIG. 97 (b), and FIG. 97 (c). It is determined using the conversion count lottery table at the time of change of small role probability.

  When the star-matched replay is won, the number of continuation games in the small role probability variation state is determined using the small role probability variation game number lottery table shown in FIG. The number of continuing games in the small role probability changing state is determined to be 5 games at a rate of 30%. Also, 10 games are determined at a rate of 60%, and 30 games are determined at a rate of 10%.

  Further, when winning the star-matched replay, simultaneously with the determination of the number of continuing games in the small role probability changing state, the magnification at the time of changing the small role probability is determined using the conversion ratio lottery table at the small role probability changing time shown in FIG. The conversion ratio of the small combination conversion control in the small combination probability changing state is determined to be double at a rate of 50%, and is determined to be 5 times at a rate of 30%. Further, it is determined 10 times at a rate of 18%, and is determined 30 times at a rate of 2%.

  The execution ratio of the small combination conversion control at the time of changing the small combination probability is determined according to the magnification determined using the small combination probability changing conversion magnification lottery table shown in FIG. For example, if the winning probability of the symbol conversion lottery is 3% when “Bell”, “AT10” to “AT1” are established, and the conversion magnification is determined to be double in a state other than the small role probability changing state, In the small role conversion probability change state, the symbol conversion lottery is won with a probability of 6%. If the conversion magnification is determined to be 30 times, the symbol conversion lottery is won with a probability of 90% in the small combination conversion probability change state.

  In the small combination probability changing state, when winning the symbol conversion lottery, the number of symbol conversions is determined with reference to the small number probability changing conversion number lottery table shown in FIG. 97 (c). Specifically, one symbol conversion is executed at a rate of 65.5%, and symbol conversion is executed at a rate of 29.0%. Further, the symbol conversion is executed 3 times at a rate of 4.5%, and the symbol conversion is executed 4 times at a rate of 1.0%.

  In the case other than the small role probability changing state, the symbol conversion control is executed when the result of the internal lottery is “out of”, “bell”, “AT10” to “AT1”. The symbol conversion control can be executed when the lottery result is “watermelon 2”, “watermelon 1”, “cherry 3”, “cherry 2”, or the like.

  Further, the slot machine 5 counts the number of times the star-like miss replay is won. Then, when the number of wins for the star-matched mistake-free replay reaches a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times, the small-playing probability change state is entered. When the state changes to the small role probability changing state in this way, the same processing as that in the case of winning the star-like replay and shifting to the small role probability changing state is performed. Note that the number of wins for Miss Replays with a set of stars is reset to zero at the time of transition to the small role probability change state.

[Number of initial games in ART gaming state]
In the slot machine 5, when the effect control board 510 shifts to the ART game state, the initial number of games in the ART game state is determined. The initial game number corresponds to the profit described in the solving means, and is determined by an initial game number determination game of the ART game described later. The initial game number determination game is executed by the main board 409 and the effect control board 510. An initial game number determination game is started by the main board 409 and the effect control board 510, and the advantageous gaming state is ended when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The main board 409 and the effect control board 510 correspond to the profit provision state control means described in the solving means. The initial number of games in the ART gaming state is shown in FIG. 98A, the initial game number determination continuation probability determination table, the initial game number determination press count determination table, shown in FIG. 98B, and FIG. 98C. It is determined using the unit addition game number determination table when determining the initial number of games.

  The initial number of games is determined by a game for determining the number of initial games of the ART game (hereinafter referred to as “initial game number determination game”), which is performed by looping an additional game for adding the unit additional game number. The number of games determined at the time when the loop for adding the number of units added game is completed and the initial game number determination game is ended becomes the initial number of games in the ART gaming state. In the initial game number determination game, when the number of additional games is determined for each additional game, the additional game continuation lottery is executed, and when the additional game continuation lottery is won, the game can be looped to the next additional game. When the game is lost, the initial game number determination game ends. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), the continuation probability of the additional game loop is determined according to the number of continuations (the number of loops). The remaining number of ART games in the ART game becomes the continuation condition of the advantageous gaming state, and the continuation condition is eased by adding the initial number of games by the additional game continuation lottery. The effect control board 510 serves as an advantageous gaming state continuation control means.

  Specifically, the continuation probability is 50% when the number of additional games is 3-5, the continuation probability is 66.6% when the 6th to 10th games, and the continuation probability is 90% after the 11th game. . Note that the continuation probability is 100% for the first and second continuation times of the extra game, and the process always shifts to the next loop. Therefore, the initial game number determination game is continued at least three times. In this case, when determining the initial number of games, it is possible to prevent a situation where the loop ends once, and to reduce the player's disappointment.

  However, the loop rate of the extra game can be determined in other manners. For example, the initial value of the loop rate is not fixed to 50% as described above, and can be determined by lottery. By determining the initial value of the loop rate by a lottery or the like without being limited to a constant value, it is possible to diversify the sense of expectation for the loop rate and further the expectation for the initial number of games.

  Further, the loop rate may not be set to 100% for the first time and the second time, and may be finished in the first time or the second time. Alternatively, at a predetermined number of times, for example, by setting the loop rate of the 10th to 14th times to 100%, if it is continued until the 10th time, the continuation of 5 times or more is compensated, so it is attempted to continue until the 10th time The goal can be presented to the player.

  In addition, in the case of an extra game when determining the initial number of games, if the extra game continuation lottery is won, the extra lottery (when the initial game number is determined) when the production button 800 shown in FIG. Addition lottery) is won, and at this time, the number of unit additional games is determined. The extra lottery is an advantageous lottery.

  When the winning game continuation lottery is won, the number of presses of the effect button 800 is determined with reference to the initial game number determination pressing number determination table shown in FIG. At the point in time when there is a pressing operation of the effect button 800 determined as the number of pressing times determined here, the number of unit additional games and the winning of the additional game continuous lottery are notified. Then, if the player is lost (not won) in the extra game continuation lottery, even if the push button 800 is pressed five times, the number of unit extra games and the winning of the extra game continuation lottery will not be notified, and the initial The game number determination game ends.

  When winning the extra game continuation lottery, specifically, if the number of loops is 1st to 5th, the probability of winning the extra lottery at the first press of the production button 800 is 1.0%. The probability of winning the lottery is 1.0%. The probability of winning an extra lottery at the third press is 8.0%, the probability of winning an extra lottery at the fourth press is 10.0%, and the probability of winning an extra lottery at the fifth press is 80. 0%.

  When the number of loops is the sixth to the tenth, the probability of winning the extra lottery when the production button 800 is pressed for the first time is 10.0%, and the probability of winning the extra lottery when the second time is pressed is 2.0%. The probability of winning an extra lottery at the third press is 2.0%, the probability of winning an extra lottery at the fourth press is 38.0%, and the probability of winning an extra lottery at the fifth press is 48. 0%.

  When the number of loops is the 11th to the 20th, the probability of winning the extra lottery when the production button 800 is pressed for the first time is 10.0%, and the probability of winning the extra lottery when the second time is pressed is 30.0%. Also, the probability of winning an extra lottery at the third press is 30.0%, the probability of winning an extra lottery at the fourth press is 28.0%, and the probability of winning an extra lottery at the fifth press is 2. 0%.

  When the number of loops is 21st or later, the probability of winning an extra lottery when the effect button 800 is pressed for the first time is 60.0%, and the probability of winning an extra lottery when the second time is pressed is 35.0%. The probability of winning the extra lottery at the third and fourth presses is 0%, and the probability of winning the extra lottery at the fifth press is 5.0%. Note that when the loop is ended after being defeated in the extra game continuation lottery, even if the production button 800 is pressed five times, the extra lottery will not be won and a notice that the initial game number determination game will end will be made. The number of initial games decided on is announced.

  Further, in each successive round when determining the initial number of games, the number of unit added games determined with reference to the unit added game number determination table shown in FIG. 98 (c) is added. Specifically, 10 games, 30 games, 50 games, 100 games, and 300 games are set as the unit added game number.

  When the number of loops is from 1st to 5th, 10 games are determined at a rate of 60.0%, and 30 games are determined at a rate of 30.0%. Further, 50 games are determined at a rate of 9.0%, and 100 games are determined at a rate of 0.99%. Furthermore, 300 games are determined at a rate of 0.01%.

  When the number of loops is 6th to 10th, 10 games are determined at a rate of 40.0%, and 30 games are determined at a rate of 45.0%. Further, 50 games are determined at a rate of 14.0%, and 100 games are determined at a rate of 0.99%. Furthermore, 300 games are determined at a rate of 0.01%.

  When the number of loops is 11th to 20th, 10 games are determined at a rate of 40.0%, and 30 games are determined at a rate of 34.0%. In addition, 50 games are determined at a rate of 25.0%, and 100 games are determined at a rate of 0.99%. Furthermore, 300 games are determined at a rate of 0.01%.

  After the 21st loop, 10 games are determined at a rate of 44.0%, and 30 games are determined at a rate of 35.0%. Further, 50 games are determined at a rate of 20.0%, and 100 games are determined at a rate of 0.9%. Furthermore, 300 games are determined at a rate of 0.1%. Thus, as the number of loops increases, the average number of games added as a unit is increased. This is the period during which the extra game continuation lottery is performed. The end of the predetermined period is imminent, for example, when there are about 1 to 3 games until the end of the predetermined period. Further, the effect control board 510 that executes the extra game continuation lottery and the extra lottery in the initial game number determination game serves as a feeling of expectation sustaining means.

  In addition, the initial game number determination game includes a plurality of interests as interests that the player is expected to be interested in. One of them is the continuation probability of the extra game determined by referring to the initial game number determination continuation rate determination table shown in FIG. In addition, as another one, it is the unit added game number determined with reference to the unit added game number determination table shown in FIG. 98C for each added game.

  The continuation probability of the addition game can be roughly imagined by the number of continuations of the addition game. For example, if the extra game has continued 10 times or more, it can be assumed that the continuation probability of the extra game is high. On the other hand, the number of unit additional games can be recognized by a notification performed at the end of one additional game each time the additional game is executed.

  Therefore, at the stage where the number of additional games executed in the initial game number determination game is small, the continuation probability of the additional game is difficult to assume, and it becomes easier to assume gradually each time the additional game is executed. By executing the extra game, it is easily assumed that the continuation probability of the extra game is high. On the other hand, since the number of unit additional games is notified every time an additional game is executed, the recognition is easy regardless of the number of times the additional game is executed.

  On the effect control board 510, while the initial game number determination game is being executed, a plurality of lotteries are assumed that the player is expected to be interested in. The effect control board 510 serves as a lottery execution means.

[ART interruption control]
In the slot machine 5, when “Cherry 3”, “Cherry 2”, “Cherry 1” are won, the ART interruption control execution lottery is performed, and when the ART interruption control execution lottery is won, the main board 409 and the production control board 510 , ART interruption control (game number subtraction interruption control) is executed. The main board 409 and the effect control board 510 serve as a reduction means for reducing the number of remaining games that can execute the ART game state and interrupting the reduction of the number of remaining games in the ART game by satisfying the reduction stop condition. In addition, the main board 409 and the effect control board 510 satisfy a predetermined reduction end condition such that a symbol combination such as a strong cherry symbol combination is displayed a predetermined number of times, thereby reducing the interruption of the reduction of the remaining number of games. It becomes an end means.

  In the ART interruption control execution lottery, the winning probability is 0.39% when winning “Cherry 3” and 20% when winning “Cherry 2”. This is 50% of the value for winning “Cherry 1”. When the ART interruption control is executed, the number of cherries displayed until the ART interruption ends is determined using the ART interruption end cherry number determination table shown in FIG.

  Specifically, the cherry symbol combination (strong cherry symbol combination, weak cherry symbol combination, middle cherry symbol combination) or bonus symbol combination is displayed by the number of winnings of “Cherry 3”, “Cherry 2”, “Cherry 1” or symbol conversion control. The probability that the ART interruption control is terminated when the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “number of times of cherry display, etc.”) is 1 is 40%. Further, the probability that the ART interruption control is determined to end when the number of cherry display etc. becomes two is 25%.

  Further, the probability that the ART interruption control is determined to end when the number of cherry display etc. is three is 20%. Further, the probability that the ART interruption control is determined to end when the number of cherry display etc. becomes 5 is 10%. Then, the probability that the ART interruption control is determined to end when the number of cherry display etc. reaches 10 is set to 5%.

  Further, the execution probability of the symbol conversion control is increased while the ART interruption control is being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), when the number of remaining cherries until the end of the ART interruption control is 1, the result of the internal lottery is “out”, “bell”, “AT10” to “AT1”. The symbol conversion control is executed in 10% of cases (hereinafter referred to as “ordinary small part etc.”).

  Similarly, when the number of cherries remaining until the ART interruption control is completed is two or three, the symbol conversion control is executed with the result of the internal lottery being 15% of “ordinary small roles”. When the number of cherries remaining until the end of the ART interruption control is four or five, the symbol conversion control is executed when the result of the internal lottery is 20% of “ordinary small role etc.”.

  When the number of cherries remaining until the ART interruption control is finished is any one of 6 to 9, the symbol conversion control is executed when the result of the internal lottery is 30% of “ordinary small role etc.”. When the number of cherries remaining until the end of the ART interruption control is 10, the symbol conversion control is executed when the result of the internal lottery is 50% of “ordinary small role etc.”.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), during the ART interruption control, the display probability of the cherry symbol combination or the like is changed. The smaller the number of cherries remaining until the ART interruption control ends, the lower the probability of display of the cherry symbol combination or the like. Try to reduce it. Thus, by promoting the continuation of the ART interruption state, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the continuation of the ART interruption control. The main board 409 and the effect control board 510 serve as interrupted state maintaining means.

[Add lottery]
The extra lottery executed during the ART is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. For example, when the result of the internal lottery is a so-called rare role such as “Cherry 3”, “Cherry 2”, “Cherry 1”, “Watermelon 2”, “Watermelon 1”, “Chance Eye”, etc., the extra lottery is executed and the extra lottery is executed When a winning is won, a predetermined number of games is added to the remaining number of games of ART. In addition to the above-described mode, the extra lottery can be executed, for example, when all the winning combinations are won. Further, the number of games to be added can be fixed, or can be determined according to the winning combination. Furthermore, the number of games to be added can be determined in advance, or can be determined by lottery or the like. As the lottery at this time, for example, it can be executed once when a winning combination is won, or can be executed a plurality of times. Further, when determining the number of games to be added, a lottery for determining the number of added games when a predetermined operation, for example, an operation of pressing the effect button 800 is executed can be executed. In this case, in the aspect of determining the number of games over a plurality of times, the player presses the effect button 800 a plurality of times, and the player can enjoy the pressing operation of the effect button 800 correspondingly.

[Profit from symbol conversion control]
Further, in the slot machine 5, during ART, in addition to the result of the internal lottery, when symbol conversion control is executed and symbol combinations such as “Cherry 3”, “Cherry 2”, and “Cherry 1” are displayed, An extra lottery is executed. Here, as the winning probability of the extra lottery, the winning probability of the extra lottery when the “cherry 3”, “cherry 2”, “cherry 1”, etc. are won in the internal lottery and the symbol conversion control is executed. 3 ”,“ Cherry 2 ”,“ Cherry 1 ”, and the like are displayed in common. However, it is also possible to make both the lottery probabilities different. When both have different lottery probabilities, for example, “Cherry 2” is higher than “Cherry 2”, and “Cherry 1” is higher than “Cherry 2”. Can be made common.

  In addition, during the general state and bonus, the ART transfer lottery is executed based on the establishment (winning) of the predetermined small role with reference to the ART transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 96. Even when conversion control is executed, an ART transfer lottery is executed. The winning probability of the ART transfer lottery at this time is the winning probability of the extra lottery when the “Cherry 3”, “Cherry 2”, “Cherry 1”, etc. are won in the internal lottery, and the symbol conversion control is executed. 3 ”,“ Cherry 2 ”,“ Cherry 1 ”, and the like are displayed in common. However, it is also possible to make both the lottery probabilities different. When both have different lottery probabilities, for example, “Cherry 2” is higher than “Cherry 2”, and “Cherry 1” is higher than “Cherry 2”. Can be made common.

[Progress of game]
In the slot machine 5 according to the present embodiment, the game progresses mainly in the general state, during the bonus, and the ART gaming state. The outline of the flow will be described below. In the slot machine 5, the game is normally started from the general state. Even when a game is started from another game state, the game flow is the same.

[Transition into bonus]
If the bonus combination is won during execution of the general state or the ART gaming state, the inside of the bonus is transferred. While the bonus is inside, a bonus symbol combination that is not displayed in the general state and the ART gaming state can be displayed. When the bonus symbol combination is displayed in the bonus display inside the symbol display window 401, the bonus symbol combination is displayed. Migrate to

[Transition to ART gaming state]
If the ART transition lottery is won and the ART transition condition is satisfied during execution of the general state, the state shifts from the general state to the ART gaming state. At this time, after the ART transition condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the ART gaming state through a predetermined sign game. If the ART transition condition is satisfied during the bonus, the transition to the ART gaming state is made after the bonus is completed. However, when shifting from the bonus to the ART gaming state, the transition may be made before the bonus is ended, or after a predetermined number of waiting games have been passed after the ART transition condition is satisfied or after the bonus is ended. It is also possible to shift to the ART gaming state.

[Transition to general status]
If the bonus transition ends without the ART transition condition being satisfied during the bonus, the transition is made to the general state after the bonus termination. Further, when the predetermined number of continued games in the ART gaming state is finished (consumed), the state is then shifted to the general state. The transition to the general state may be performed during the bonus or immediately after the ART gaming state ends, or after a bonus or the ART gaming state ends, a predetermined condition, for example, a bell bump in the symbol display window 401 It may be performed when there is a display. Hereinafter, during bonus (bonus game) and ART (ART game state) will be further described.

[Bonus game and ART]
In the slot machine 5, as in the slot machine 3, a real bonus and a pseudo bonus are provided. As the real bonus, an RB game is provided in addition to the BB game. As shown in FIG. 100, when the BB symbol combination (the symbol combination of “7”-“7”-“7”) is displayed on the active line 623a (see FIG. 47), the BB game is entered. Note that winning the BB in the internal lottery is a precondition for displaying the symbol combination of “7”-“7”-“7” on the active line 623a.

  When transitioning to the BB game, the decoration character “Dynamite BIG BONUS!” Is displayed on the image display body 500 together with the character, and the player's sense of excitement due to the transition to the BB game can be instigated. In the BB game, only a three-sheet game can be executed, and the BB game end condition is that the number of medals to be paid out exceeds 273.

  As shown in FIG. 101, an RB symbol combination (“7”-“7”-“bar”) is displayed on the active line 623a (see FIG. 47), and the RB game is entered. Note that winning the RB in the internal lottery is a precondition for displaying the symbol combination “7”-“7”-“bar” on the active line 623a.

  When shifting to the RB game, a decorative character “Dynamite REG BONUS!” Is displayed on the image display body 500 together with the first character CD. In this case, although the profit given to the player is smaller than that of the BB game, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of uplift due to the transition to the RB game. In the RB game, only a three-sheet game can be executed. The RB game end condition is different from that of the BB game, and the RB game ends when 30 games are consumed.

  Furthermore, when the ART transition condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 102, the image display body 500 includes a plurality of first character CD, second character CG, and third character CE as decoration characters “HERO RUSH”. Are displayed together with the fourth character CM. Since the ART transition condition is based on the condition that a predetermined number of precursor games is consumed, various symbol combinations such as a combination of symbols of a losing pattern are displayed in the symbol display window 401 when shifting to ART. The ART game is continued until the initial number of games and the number of additional games determined in the above procedure are consumed, and is ended after the number of these games has been consumed, or during the transition to BB or RB.

  Next, a procedure for a game in the slot machine 5 will be described. In the slot machine 5, as with the slot machines 1 and 3, when the start lever 210 shown in FIG. 92 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate. At this time, in the main board 409, an internal lottery is executed and the winning combination is determined. Further, the first character D is displayed on the image display body 500, and a predetermined effect is executed.

  Subsequently, when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, and symbol combinations are displayed. Then, the privilege according to the displayed symbol combination is provided. Benefits here include payout of medals and transition of gaming state.

[Game for determining the initial number of ART games]
When the state shifts to the ART gaming state, first, an initial game number determination game is played. The initial game number determination game is executed in one game after winning the ART transfer lottery and satisfying the ART transfer condition. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated after the image shown in FIG. 102 is displayed on the image display body 500, freeze control is executed, and the one-sheet insertion button 205, the MAX insertion button 206 in the slot machine 1, Reception of the operation elements such as the start lever 210 and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is invalidated. However, the reception of the effect button 800 is made valid. Freeze control continues until the initial game number determination game ends.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), a decorative character “HERO CHALLENGE!” Is displayed on the image display body 500, and an image in which each character CD, CG, CE, CM is banzai is displayed. Then, an initial game number determination game for determining the initial game number of the ART game is started.

  When the initial game number determination game is performed, the player is notified that the initial game number determination game is performed by displaying the image shown in FIG. It is increasing. The initial game number determination game is played before the internal lottery based on the operation of the start lever 210 is executed. For this reason, the internal lottery is executed after the initial game number determination game is completed. As described above, the internal lottery is executed after the initial game number of the ART game is determined, so that when the initial game number is determined and the rare small role is won, the ART game is lengthened. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ART gaming state will be finished in a short time, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the initial game number determination game, an additional game continuation lottery and a unit additional game number lottery are executed. The continuation probability at the time of the additional game number continuous lottery in the initial game number determination game is the winning probability of the additional game continuation lottery, and is determined by referring to the initial game number determination continuation probability determination table shown in FIG. Is called. As the continuation probability, the number of loops is set to 100% in the first addition game (hereinafter, the nth addition game is referred to as “nth addition game”) and the second addition game, and the initial game number determination game is The game is always played up to the third addition game.

  When the initial game number determination game is started, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), a decorative character “Destroy within 5 times!” Is displayed on the image display device 500 and an effect button indicating an effect button 800 is displayed. Display image 800A is displayed. With the display of the effect button display image 800A, the player is prompted to press the effect button 800. Also, at this time, by displaying images supported by the respective characters CD, CG, CE, and CM, the feeling of expectation that the number of initial games of the ART game becomes a large number of games by the initial game number determination game is increased. Yes.

  In the first extra game, the effect button 800 is operated by the number of presses determined with reference to the press count determination table at the time of initial game number determination shown in FIG. 98 (b), and is added in the first extra game. The number of added games is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the remaining number display image NP composed of the decoration character “5” indicating the maximum number of times that the extra lottery is executed is “5”. And an egg image EP imitating an egg is displayed on the right side of the image display body 500. Further, the first character CD, the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM are displayed in the center of the image display body 500, and an image that attempts to break the egg image EP is displayed.

  Subsequently, when the player or the like presses the effect button 800, an effect in which the egg image EP is broken by the first character CD, the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM is displayed. Here, if the extra lottery is not won, a countdown display in which the number of the remaining number display image NP is subtracted by 1 is performed. In addition, the egg image EP changes to a cracked image by pressing the effect button 800.

  Then, when winning the extra lottery, for example, if the extra lottery is won when the effect button 800 is pressed for the third time and 10 games are determined as the unit extra game number, as shown in FIG. The number of the number display image NP is displayed as “2”, and an image in which the egg image EP is destroyed is displayed. Here, a decorative character “Good!” Is displayed together with the egg image EP. In addition to “Good!”, Decorative characters such as “Excellent!” And “Perfect!” Can be displayed. When these decoration characters are displayed, there is a high possibility that the number of games will be larger by adding the unit than when the decoration characters “Good!” Are displayed. In this way, the sense of expectation for the number of added games is increased by the form of the decorative characters.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the image display body 500 includes a delighted first character CD, a second character CG, a third character CE, a fourth character, along with an egg image EP that is broken and splattered. A character CM is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), a unit added game number image AP of “+10” is displayed at the center of the image display body 500. With this unit added game number image AP, the player can recognize the unit added game number.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the characters “NEXT” are displayed at the center of the image display body 500 to allow the player to recognize the continuation of the additional game. Furthermore, the total number of unit added games added in the added game so far is displayed on the upper left of the image display body 500. Then, after the image shown in FIG. 103 (b) is displayed and the player is prompted to press the effect button 800, the image shown in FIG. 106 (b) is displayed, and so on until it is lost in the extra lottery. Image display control is performed. At this time, the remaining number display image NP shown in FIG. 104 (b) and the unit addition shown in FIG. 105 (b) according to the number of presses of the effect button 800 when winning the extra lottery and the determined unit additional game number. The display of the game number image AP changes.

  In addition, the case where the winning lottery is lost will be described. From the image shown in FIG. 104 (a) to the image shown in FIG. 104 (b), the remaining number display image is displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (a). When the NP number is “0”, the player chooses an extra lottery and causes the player to recognize the end of the initial game number determination game. The image shown in FIG. 107A is referred to as an “initial game number determination game end image” for convenience. At this time, an image in which the first character CD, the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM are turned over is displayed on the image display body 500, which expresses regret for the end of the addition game. The image display 500 displays the total number of unit added games added by the added game. In this example, a number “+250” is displayed as the total number of units added games.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), a decoration character of “+250”, which is the total number of unit added games, is displayed large in the center of the image display body 500. Hereinafter, the image shown in FIG. 107B is referred to as an ART initial game number display image. This unit added game number is the initial game number of the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state. Thus, by displaying the initial number of games in the ART gaming state largely in the center of the image display body 500 using the ART initial game number display image, the player can easily recognize the initial number of games in the ART gaming state.

  Subsequently, the freeze control is ended, and as shown in FIG. 108A, a decorative character “HERO RUSH!” Is displayed on the image display body 500 to notify the player that the ART gaming state starts. . At this time, an image is displayed in which the first character CD, the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM congratulate the transition to the ART gaming state. In this way, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the transition to the ART gaming state.

  Thereafter, by the end of the freeze control, the initial game number determination game is ended, and an internal lottery in one game in which the initial game number determination game is performed is executed. As shown in FIG. By displaying a decoration character of “HERO RUSH START”, the player is notified that the ART gaming state starts from the next game. Further, by displaying a decorative character of “250G”, the player is notified that the initial number of games in the ART gaming state is 250 games.

  Thereafter, by operating the stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is displayed in the symbol display window 401. For example, when the strong cherry is won by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is displayed in the symbol display window 401, the number of games in the ART gaming state can be increased. The number of added games is notified later, but can be notified here. In this example, until the result of the internal lottery is displayed, the image display body 500 displays an image displaying the number of initial games in the ART gaming state. It is also possible to execute various effects according to the response.

  Note that the internal lottery is executed based on the operation of the start lever 210 when the initial game number determination game is started. However, the lottery for adding the number of games based on the result of the internal lottery is a stop button 211a, 211b, 211c. Is executed based on the operation of the last stop button. However, the internal lottery can also be executed after the freeze control ends. In this case, for example, the internal lottery can be executed after the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start rotating until the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated.

  Then, when the start lever 210 is operated to start the ART gaming state, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the image display body 500 has the first character CD, the second character CG, the third character CE, and the first character. The 4-character CM displays effects in which various actions are performed, and the progress of the ART game is enhanced to improve the interest. In addition, in the upper right portion of the image display body 500, a small 249G decoration character indicating the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is displayed.

  In this way, in the initial game number determination game of the ART game, in the additional continuation lottery, the additional game is executed, the effect button 800 is pressed, and the number of presses of the effect button 800 is increased within 5 times to win the lottery. The number of added games is added, and the next added game is entered. Similarly, in the next addition game, when the number of pressing the effect button 800 is 5 or less and the winning lottery is won, the number of unit additional games is added and the process proceeds to the next addition game. These initial game number determination games are executed by the main board 409 and the effect control board 510. The total number of unit added games and the initial number of games is displayed on the image display body 500. The main board 409, the effect control board 510, and the image display body 500 correspond to the winning combination expectation maintaining means.

  Here, the probability of winning the extra lottery during the extra game is determined according to the number of loops of the extra game, as shown in FIG. 98 (b). For example, in the case where the number of presses of the production button 800 is low during the extra game, if the extra lottery is not won, the chance of the extra lottery gradually decreases as the extra game progresses, and there is a feeling of giving up for the extra lottery. It may occur and cause a decrease in interest.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 5, during the period of the additional game continuous lottery in a state where the number of additional game loops is small, for example, when the number of additional game loops is 1 to 5, the number of times the effect button 800 is pressed is large. The probability of winning the lottery is increased. For this reason, in the extra game, even if the number of times the effect button is pressed increases, the probability of winning the extra lottery remains until the extra game ends. In particular, in the first to fifth loop counts, 80% wins the lottery by adding the fifth press. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the winning of the extra lottery even just before the end of the period of continuing the extra game. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for an additional unit number in the initial game number determination game.

  In addition, in the slot machine 5, the extra game continuation lottery is executed for each extra game, and when the extra game continuation lottery is won, the extra lottery is won. However, every time the effect button 800 is pressed during the extra game. In addition, it is possible to determine the winning probability of the lottery. Even in this case, when the period during which the extra game continuation lottery is continued, for example, when the end of the period until the presentation button 800 is pressed five times is imminent, the winning probability of the extra lottery increases as the number of times the presentation button 800 is pressed. It is preferable that

  On the other hand, while the initial game number determination game is being executed, it is assumed that the continuation probability of the additional game and the number of unit additional games in each additional game are of interest to the player. Among these, at the stage where the number of times of the additional game is few, it is difficult to know whether or not the additional game will continue, and it is assumed that the continuation probability of the additional game is a high concern with a high degree of interest for the player. On the other hand, although the number of added games is a concern, it can be expected that if the added games continue, the number of additional games will be increased. Therefore, the degree of interest is a relatively low concern. is assumed.

  Thereafter, the initial game number determination game progresses, and even if the additional game is executed many times, the additional game may still be continued. It is considered that the continuation probability of the extra game is high from the history when the extra game is executed many times. In this case, even if the added game is continued, it is considered that it is natural to continue, and it is assumed that the interest level becomes low and the interest becomes low. On the other hand, this time, since the interest of the unit added game number with a low interest level is increased, it is assumed that the unit added game number is highly interested.

  Whether or not the additional game is continued is finally notified when the effect button 800 is pressed for the fourth time and the continuation is notified for the fifth time. On the other hand, the notification of the number of added games is notified when the effect button 800 is pressed a predetermined number of times. For this reason, when the number of times of pressing the effect button 800 is small, for example, when the number of times of pressing is the first time or the second time, the degree of attention to the added game number becomes high, the number of times of pressing increases, especially the number of times of pressing becomes the fifth time. Sometimes, the degree of attention to the continuation of the number of added games increases.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 5, at the stage where the number of additional games loops is small 1 to 5 times or 6 to 10 times, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), an effect button for notifying the number of unit added games, etc. The ratio of increasing the number of times of pressing 800 is increased to increase the degree of attention when the number of times of pressing increases. For this reason, the high attention degree notification that can increase the attention to whether or not the additional game continues is executed.

  In addition, at the stage after 11 times when the number of extra game loops is increased, the ratio of reducing the number of times of pressing the effect button 800 for notifying the number of unit additional games is increased, and the degree of attention to when the number of presses is small is increased. I try to increase it. For this reason, the high attention degree notification that can increase the attention to the number of added games is executed. The image display means 500 that executes these notices serves as a lottery result notice means and a degree-of-attention improvement means.

  As described above, when the number of unit additional games, which is a low-presumed concern in the initial number-of-games determination game, is a low assumed interest, when the number of loops increases, the number of times the effect button 800 is pressed is small. By making the notification, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the lottery result of the unit added game number, which has been a low assumed concern. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to satisfaction being satisfied by the state of joy.

  The number of continuing games in the ART gaming state is made recognizable to the player before the lottery by the lottery means in the game in which the ART gaming state is started. If the number of continued games in the ART gaming state can be recognized after the lottery result in the game in which the ART gaming state is started is displayed or the like, the number of additional games in the ART gaming state determined by the game is completed. And the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state often remains short.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 5, expectation for the lottery result of the lottery means is made possible by allowing the player to recognize the number of continuing games before the lottery by the lottery means in the game in which the ART gaming state is started. The feeling is maintained. Therefore, even after the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state is recognized by the player, there is a possibility that the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state may be added depending on the lottery result of the lottery means in the game. Yes. Thus, even after the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state can be recognized, there is a possibility that the number of continuing games can be further extended. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that AT and ART will be completed in a short time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  As the number of continued games in ART, if the number of continued games is not added during the ART gaming state, the number of continued games in the ART gaming state that can be recognized by the player is the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state. Will be all. Further, when there is an additional number of continuous games during the ART game, the number of continuous games in the ART gaming state that can be recognized by the player is a part of the number of continuous games in the ART gaming state.

  In the slot machine 5, the initial game number determination game is executed by pressing the effect button 800, but the MAX input button 206 and other buttons can be used instead of the effect button 800. May be. When the MAX insertion button 206 is used, for example, it is preferable that the MAX insertion button 206 is not invalidated and can be used for the initial game number determination game even when a replay is won in the previous game.

  Furthermore, when the initial game number determination game is performed, the freeze control is executed. However, the initial game number determination game can be performed without executing the freeze control. Further, the initial game number is determined by pressing the effect button 800 a plurality of times. However, the initial game number may be determined in a batch by canceling the press operation of the effect button 800 a plurality of times. it can.

[Transition from RB to ART gaming state]
In the slot machine 5, when an RB is won by an internal lottery during the general state or the ART gaming state, the game shifts to an RB game of 30 games. In this case, in the game after the game that won the RB, as shown in FIG. 110A, the decorative character “Aim at 77 bar!” Is displayed on the image display body 500 together with the first character CD. This display allows the player to aim for the RB symbol combination.

  When the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c according to the display on the image display body 500, the RB symbol combination is displayed on the active line 623a as shown in FIG. 110 (b). Further, the first character CD and the decorative characters “Dynamite REG BONUS!” Are displayed on the image display body 500, and the RB game is shifted to 30 games.

  During the RB game, as shown in FIG. 111 (a), an image is displayed by the character while the game is in progress. Here, an image in which the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM are looking for the lost first character CD is displayed. In addition to the display of these characters, the number of remaining RB games is displayed in the upper left of the image display body 500. This display notifies the player of the number of remaining RB games. here,

  Further, in the RB game, the ART transfer lottery with reference to the ART shift lottery table shown in FIG. 96 is performed. Here, when the ART transfer lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the first character CD is displayed large on the image display body 500, and the second character CG and the third character CG that have searched for the first character CD are displayed. An image in which the character CE and the fourth character CM are pleased surrounding the first character CD is displayed. Furthermore, a decorative character “Dynamite found!” Is displayed on the image display 500.

  Subsequently, when the starting lever 210 is operated by a player or the like, a decoration character “HERO RUSH confirmed!” Is displayed on the image display body 500 as shown in FIG. By displaying the decorative characters, it is possible to notify the player of the transition to the ART gaming state.

  Further, when shifting to the ART gaming state, the remaining number of RB games is carried over to the ART game and added to the remaining number of ART games. In the example shown in FIG. 112A, the ART transfer lottery is won when the number of remaining RB games is 25. For this reason, since 25 games, which are the remaining number of RB games, are carried over and added to the ART game, a decoration character “+25” is displayed on the image display body 500. By this display, it is possible to notify the player that 25 games, which are the remaining number of RB games, are added to the ART game.

  Subsequently, after the prescribed number of RB games is exhausted, as shown in FIG. 112B, when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated to stop the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, the image display body 500 is displayed. Is displayed with a decorative character “HERO RUSH!” To notify the player that the ART gaming state starts. At this time, an image is displayed in which the first character CD, the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM congratulate the transition to the ART gaming state. In this way, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the transition to the ART gaming state.

  Further, if the ART transition lottery is won before the number of remaining games becomes 0 during the RB and the game is exhausted, the gaming state shifts from the RB to the ART gaming state. In this case, the number of remaining games in the RB is carried over to the ART game. For this reason, also when shifting to the ART gaming state from RB, the number of continuations of the ART gaming state can be increased by shifting to the ART gaming state earlier during RB. The main board 409 and the effect control board 510 serve as a preceding advantageous gaming state end control means and a condition carry-over means.

  If there is no carry-over of the remaining number of games, when there is a remaining number of games in the RB, the RB game may not be completely digested when winning the ART transition lottery and shifting to the ART gaming state. For this reason, when a sufficient number of remaining games remain during the RB game, the interest in shifting to the ART gaming state is low, and it may be difficult to remember the tension during the game.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 5, when the gaming state is shifted from the RB to the ART gaming state, the remaining number of games in the RB can be carried over to the ART gaming state when the gaming state is shifted to the ART advantageous gaming state. For this reason, even when transitioning from the RB to the ART gaming state, the transition at an earlier time during the RB is more advantageous because the continuation permission condition during the RB is carried over. Therefore, while playing the RB game, by making the player expect to shift to the ART gaming state as soon as possible, the player who is playing the RB game can maintain a sense of tension. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Thereafter, the above initial game number determination game is executed to determine the initial game number in the ART gaming state. Here, an example is shown in which the initial number of ART games is determined to be 50 games. After the initial game number is determined by the initial game number determination game, when the start lever 210 is operated, as shown in FIG. 113A, the image display 500 is decorated with “HERO RUSH START!”. Display characters. This display can inform the player that the ART game is starting.

  At this time, “50G + 25G” is displayed on the image display body 500. This number of games is a numerical value indicating 50 games determined as the initial number of games and 25 games carried over from the RB game. Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), after the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated to stop the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, a decoration character “75G” is displayed on the image display body 500. . In this way, the player is notified that the ART game whose remaining games are 75 games starts. When the operation lever 210 is operated, as shown in FIG. 109, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c start to rotate, and the ART gaming state starts.

  Further, in the slot machine 5, a small role probability changing game may be executed during the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state, or an ART interruption game may be executed during the ART gaming state. Note that the small role probability changing game may be executed during the bonus. Below, these small role probability change games and ART interruption games will be described.

[Short role change game]
When the star-matched replay is won in the general state, during BB, during RB, and ART game state, the small role probability change state is entered, and the small role probability change game is executed. For example, if the star-matched replay is won during the ART gaming state, a decorative character “Aim at the << star symbol from the right!” Is displayed on the image display body 500 as shown in FIG. In addition, an image of an arrow pointing to the left side is displayed on the image display body 500 at the same time, prompting the player to press the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c in the order of “right → middle → left”, As a display result, a star-matched replay symbol combination in which a star symbol is displayed on the middle line of each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is aimed to be displayed. Furthermore, the image display body 500 represents the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM, and the expectation for the display of the star-aligned replay is enhanced. The display of the image display body 500 at this time is an instruction for an operation for aiming at a predetermined display result. The image display body 500 serves as an operation instruction unit.

  When the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated in order from the right in accordance with the display of the image display body 500, when the right reel stop button 211c and the middle reel stop button 211b are operated, as shown in FIG. 114 (b). The “star symbol” is displayed in the middle of the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c. Subsequently, the left reel stop button 211a is operated to display a star symbol in the middle stage of the left reel 301a. In this way, when the star-matched replay symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display window 401, as shown in FIG. 115 (a), the decorative character “small role probability variation zone!” Is displayed on the image display body 500, Informs the player of the transition to the small role certain change state. The main board 409 and the effect control board 510 are operations that are advantageous to the player when the star display replay symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display window 401 as a result of the operation according to the instruction of the image display body 500 being executed. A shift to a small role probability change game is given as a corresponding privilege. The main board 409 and the effect control board 510 serve as operation-related privilege giving means.

  Even when an operation according to the display of the image display is executed, depending on the operation timing of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, a star-matched replay alternative symbol combination that is a symbol combination other than the star-matched replay symbol combination is displayed. . The star-matched replay alternative symbol combination displayed at this time is a replay symbol combination different from the normal replay symbol combination. The star-matched replay symbol combination and the star-matched replay alternative symbol combination (hereinafter referred to as “star-matched replay symbol combination etc.”) have predetermined display results.

  When the star-replay alternative combination is displayed in the symbol display window 401 according to the operation timing of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, although the display on the image display 500 is performed, The decorative character “small role probability change zone!” Is displayed on the image display body 500 to notify the player of the transition to the small role probability change state.

  When the star-matched replay is won, the number of continuations of the small role probability variation game is determined with reference to the small role probability variation game number lottery table shown in FIG. 97 (a), and is also shown in FIG. 97 (b). The small combination conversion magnification is determined with reference to the small combination probability change conversion magnification lottery table. After determining the number of continuations of the small role probability change game and the small role conversion magnification, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), a decoration character of “× 30” is displayed and the small role conversion magnification is 30 times. Informing the player.

  At this time, the first character CD, the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM are displayed on the image display body 500, and a sense of expectation for the small role probability change game is expressed. In the slot machine 5, the slot machine 5 is configured not to display the number of small role probability change games. For this reason, since it is made for a player not to know how long a small role probability change game will continue, the expectation with respect to the continuation of a small role probability change game can be raised.

  In the slot machine 5, the number of small role probability change games is determined as a fixed number by referring to the small role probability change continued game number lottery table at the time of transition to the small role probability change game. A mode in which a lottery is executed by adding the number of games for the role-changing game may be executed, or the small-combination conversion magnification may be determined at any time for each game or for each unit game such as three games.

[Number of missed replays won by stars]
When the star-like misreplay is won, the right reel stop button 211c and the middle reel stop button 211b are operated in accordance with the display on the image display body 500 shown in FIG. 114 (a), thereby FIG. 114 (b). As shown in the figure, star symbols are respectively displayed in the middle stages of the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c. Thereafter, when the left reel stop button 211a is operated, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), a watermelon symbol is displayed in the middle of the left reel 301a, not a star symbol, and the star symbol is displayed in the lower portion of the left reel 301a. Is done. In this way, a star-like misreplay symbol combination, which is one of symbol combinations other than the star-matched replay symbol combination, is displayed in the symbol display window 401.

  Further, even when the operation according to the display of the image display body is executed when winning the star-like misreplay, depending on the operation timing of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the symbol combinations other than the star-like misreplay symbol combinations are used. The star-matched misreplay alternative symbol combinations are displayed. The star-matched replay alternative symbol combination displayed at this time is a replay symbol combination different from the normal replay symbol combination and the star-matched replay alternative symbol combination. The star-matched mis-replay symbol combination and the star-matched mis-play alternative symbol combination (hereinafter referred to as “star-matched mis-replay symbol combinations, etc.”) result in an abnormal display result, and the display of the star-aligned mis-replay symbol combination is an abnormal display result. It becomes a display fact.

  At this time, on the image display body 500, a decoration character of “Sorry!” Is displayed, and an image in which the first character CD, the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM are lost is displayed. Is done. In this way, the player has not won the star-matched replay, and has lost the sense of loss that the player can remember by winning the star-like miss replay.

  When a star-like misreplay symbol combination or the like is displayed, the main board 409 stores the display count of the star-like misreplay symbol combination or the like. By displaying a star-like misreplay symbol combination or the like, the display count of the star-like misreplay symbol combination or the like is added once. The effect control board 510 adds the number of times of display such as a star-like misreplay symbol combination, and then displays the first character CD, the second character CG, and the third character on the image display body 500 as shown in FIG. The CE and the fourth character CM each display a circular figure drawn in a sector cell. Here, the square in which the first character CD is displayed is “upper left area”, the square in which the second character CG is displayed is “lower right area”, and the square in which the third character CE is displayed is “upper right area”. The square where the fourth character CM is displayed is referred to as a “lower left area”.

  At this time, when the number of display times of the star-like misreplay symbol combination stored in the main board 409 is the first time, the third character CE in the circular graphic displayed on the image display body 500 is displayed. The color in the upper right area is displayed in a different color from the other squares. Further, the color of the upper right area in the circular figure changes, and the third character CE displayed in the upper right area is displayed so as to jump out of the circular figure. The pop-out third character CE is represented as a figure that seems to be stronger than the figure displayed in the upper right area of the circular figure. When the circular symbol is displayed thereafter, the strongly expressed third character CE is displayed in the upper right area of the circular figure until the small-probability change state is entered.

  When the number of display times of a star-miscible replay symbol combination or the like is stored as one, and when a star-like misreplay symbol combination or the like is displayed next, the main board 409 displays a star-miscible misreplay symbol combination or the like. And the number of times stored as the display count of the star-like misreplay symbol combination is the second, and the color of the lower right area where the second character CG is displayed is different from the color of the upper left and upper areas. Will be displayed. The colors in the lower right area at this time are the same as the colors in the upper right area, but they can be different colors, expressed with patterns instead of colors, or combined with colors and patterns. You can also. At this time, the second character CG jumps out from the lower right area of the circular figure. The protruding second character CG is represented as a figure that seems to be stronger than the figure displayed in the lower right area of the circular figure, and when the circular figure is displayed after that, the small character shifts to the small role probability change state. Until now, the second character CE expressed in a strong manner is displayed in the lower right region of the circular figure.

  Further, when the number of display times of the star-matched misreplay symbol combination or the like is stored as 2 times and the star-like misreplay symbol combination or the like is displayed next, the main board 409 displays the star-matched misreplay symbol combination or the like. The number of display times of the combination, etc. is added, and the number of times stored as the display count of the star-like misreplay symbol combination is the third time, and the color of the lower left area where the fourth character CM is displayed is different from the color of the upper left area Will be displayed. In addition, a display in which the fourth character CM jumps out from the lower left area of the circular figure is performed. The popped-out fourth character CM is displayed as a figure that seems to be stronger than the figure displayed in the lower right area of the circular figure. When the circular figure is displayed after that, the fourth character CM shifts to the small role probability changing state. In the lower left area of the circular figure, the second character CE expressed so strongly is displayed.

  Then, when the number of display times of the star-matched misreplay symbol combination or the like is stored as 3 times and the star-like misreplay symbol combination or the like is displayed next, the main board 409 displays the star-matched misreplay symbol combination or the like. The number of times of display such as the combination is added, and the number of times stored as the number of times of display of the star-like misreplay symbol combination becomes the fourth time. As shown in FIG. 117 (a), the upper left area where the first character CD is displayed is displayed. The color is changed to a color different from the original color and displayed. In addition, the fourth character CD jumps out from the upper left area of the circular figure.

  Thus, when the number of display times of the star-like misreplay symbol combination stored in the main board 409 is four times and the color of each area of the circular figure is different from the original color, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), An image as if the circular figure exploded is displayed, and the second character CG, the third character CE, and the fourth character CM are displayed in addition to the first character CD from the exploded circular figure. Furthermore, a decoration character of “small role probability change zone!” Is displayed. In this way, the player is notified of the transition to the small role probability changing state.

  In addition, after the number of display times of the star-like misreplay symbol combination stored in the effect control board 510 is four times and the state changes to the small role probability change state, the star-like misreplay symbol combination stored in the effect control board 510, etc. Is displayed 0 times. And when a star-like misreplay symbol combination or the like is displayed again, storage of the number of wins is started.

  Thus, when a star-matched replay symbol combination or the like is displayed, the player may be disappointed that the star-matched replay symbol combination is not displayed. In this respect, the main board 409 stores the number of display times of the star-like misreplay symbol combination, etc., and when the number of display times of the stored star-like misreplay symbol combination becomes four times, it is advantageous for the player. A small role probability change game is given as a predetermined privilege. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the display of the star-matched replay symbol combination without displaying the star-matched replay symbol combination. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a small number of privilege grant opportunities. In addition, the winning of the star-like misreplay can be stored by replacing the winning of the star-like misreplay with a display fact such as a star-like misreplay symbol combination.

  In addition, an operation instruction for aiming at a star symbol replay symbol combination is displayed on the image display body 500 when a privilege of shifting to the small role probability changing state is given. By giving an operation instruction that requires pressing as an operation instruction for aiming at such a star symbol replay symbol combination, it is possible to give a player a sense of tension. Furthermore, a privilege can also be provided as a reward for the effort to display the star symbol replay symbol combination by pressing. In this case, it is possible to give a privilege when a star symbol replay symbol combination is displayed, and not to grant a privilege when a star symbol replay alternative symbol combination is displayed. By providing a privilege when a star symbol replay symbol combination is displayed, a difference depending on the skill of the player can be provided.

[ART interruption game]
When the ART interruption control execution lottery is won during the ART gaming state, the ART interruption game in which the ART game state continues but the ART game subtraction is interrupted proceeds. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), when a strong cherry symbol combination of “cherry”-“cherry”-“cherry” is displayed on the effective line 623a (see FIG. 47), it is based on winning of “cherry 2”. An ART interruption control execution lottery is performed. When the ART interruption control execution lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the decoration character “Reproduction” is displayed on the image display body, and the cherry pattern is superimposed on the decoration character. The displayed image (hereinafter referred to as “cherry image”) is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the cherry image displayed on the image display 500 starts to split. Here, for example, when the number of cherries determined with reference to the ART interruption end cherry number determination table shown in FIG. 99 (a) is 10, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), there are four cherries. Display split images.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the display for dividing the cherry progresses, and the image display body 500 displays an image in which the cherry image is divided into ten pieces. Thus, the ART interruption game starts. When the ART interruption control is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (b), the remaining number of games displayed on the upper left of the image display body 500 is darkly displayed, and even if the ART gaming state progresses, the remaining games of the ART game The subtraction of is interrupted.

  On the other hand, during the ART interruption control, the number of cherries displayed during the ART interruption game, for example, 10 is displayed at the upper right of the image display body 500. Thereafter, when “Cherry 3”, “Cherry 2”, and “Cherry 1” are selected, or when the cherry symbol combination or the bonus symbol combination is displayed by the symbol conversion control, the display on the upper right of the image display 500 is subtracted by “1”. To do. Thereafter, the ART interruption game proceeds until the display on the upper right side of the image display body 500 becomes “0”.

  Further, during the ART interruption game, conversion control such as cherry is executed. The cherry conversion control is a control for executing symbol conversion control when a winning or a bell is won and changing the displayed symbol combination to a cherry symbol combination or a bonus symbol combination. As shown in FIG. 99 (b), the probability of occurrence of cherry conversion control varies depending on the remaining number of cherry display times, and as the number of remaining cherry display times increases, the greater the number of cherry display times, The execution rate is high.

  In this way, when a cherry symbol combination or the like is displayed by symbol conversion control during the ART interruption game, an extra lottery is performed. During the ART interruption game, the rate at which the symbol conversion control is executed is high, and the chances for the extra lottery increase. Therefore, the expectation for the extra lottery can be enhanced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), in the ART interruption game, when the number of remaining cherries until the ART interruption control ends is large, the display probability of the cherry symbol combination or the like by the symbol conversion control is increased. When the number of remaining cherries decreases, the display probability of cherry symbol combinations and the like is lowered. In this way, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the continuation of the ART interruption control and to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Response when a game progress interruption occurs]
While the game in the slot machine 5 is in progress, there may be a game progress interruption situation in which the progress of the game is interrupted due to a power interruption due to a power failure or the like, or various errors occurring in the slot machine 5. When a game progress interruption such as such a power interruption or error (hereinafter referred to as “power interruption”) occurs, the progress of the game is resumed after the cause of the power interruption is removed and the power interruption is resolved.

  When power interruption occurs, the display of the image display body 500 is turned off. When an error occurs, an error image corresponding to the cause of the error is displayed on the image display body 500. The error image is an image that is not displayed when the game of the slot machine 5 is possible. Then, the game can be resumed in the slot machine 5 when the power is restored from the power interruption or the cause of the error is removed, and in principle, for example, in the general state, the image display 500 is not subjected to the power interruption or the error occurrence. The image is redisplayed. However, in the following cases, the images displayed on the image display body 500 are different. Hereinafter, these examples will be described.

[Recovery from power interruption while displaying remaining number display image]
When the initial number-of-game determination game is in progress, when a predetermined number of operations of pressing the effect button 800 are executed, the success / failure of the extra lottery is notified. At this time, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the number shown as the remaining number display image NP is “5” → “4” → “3” → “2” according to the number of pressing operations of the effect button 800. → Count down as “1” → “0”. If the egg image EP is not destroyed even if the remaining number display image NP becomes “0”, the initial game number determination game ends. Therefore, every time the number of the remaining number display image NP is reduced, The number of games is about to end. Furthermore, when the remaining number of times is relatively small, for example, once or twice, the possibility that the initial game number determination game will end becomes higher.

  As described above, even when the number shown in the remaining number display image NP is relatively small, a power interruption or the like may occur. Thereafter, when the power interruption or the like is resolved, the game state is restored to the original game state and the continuation of the initial game number determination game is executed. Here, when the initial game number determination game is started when the power interruption or the like that occurred when the number shown in the remaining number display image NP becomes relatively small is resolved, the player starts the initial game number determination game. Sometimes you forget what you are doing. In this case, if the presentation button 800 is pressed without paying too much attention, it is conceivable that the game for determining the initial number of games will end unexpectedly without the player being aware of it.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 5, when the initial game number determination game is progressing, a power interruption or the like occurs, and when returning from the power interruption or the like, the power is displayed on the image display 500 when the power interruption occurs. Instead of an image, as shown in FIG. 120A, the image display body 500 displays a restored image in which the remaining number display image NP is largely highlighted at the center. For example, if a power interruption or the like occurs when a number of 1 is displayed on the remaining number display image NP, this restored image displays a large number of 1 as the remaining number display image NP in the center. In addition, a decoration character “HERO CHALLENGE” is displayed on the image display 500 in order to notify that the initial game number determination game is in progress.

  When the restored image is displayed for a certain period of time, as shown in FIG. 120B, the image displayed when the power interruption or the like occurs is displayed on the image display body 500. Thereafter, the player can be prompted to continue the initial game number determination game, and the initial game number determination game can be resumed.

  As described above, by highlighting the remaining number display image NP in the return image, it is possible to suppress erroneous recognition of the number of times that the effect button 800 can be pressed in the initial game number determination game. As a result, the presentation button 800 can be pressed while being aware of the continuation of the initial game number determination game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the initial game number determination game from being terminated unexpectedly without the player being aware of it.

  Such a return image can be displayed only when a power interruption or the like occurs and the power is restored from the power interruption or the like. By displaying the return image only when returning from the power interruption or the like, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the game has been recovered from the power interruption or the like and the initial game number determination game will be resumed. However, it is also possible to display the return image other than when the return image is returned from a power interruption or the like.

  Note that the highlighted display mode in the restored image is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 120A and can be various modes. For example, the brightness of the remaining number display image NP can be increased or can be highlighted with a color scheme different from that of an image other than the remaining number display image NP. Further, the display position of the remaining number display image NP is not limited to the center of the image display body 500, and may be another position such as an edge. Alternatively, the remaining number display image NP may be 7-segment display, dot display, or the like at a position outside the image display body 500 instead of the image display body 500. Furthermore, a sub image display body other than the image display body 500 may be provided, and the remaining number display image NP may be displayed on the sub image display body. On the other hand, as an emphasis display mode, not only image display but also sound can be used, for example.

  Further, in the above example, the display of the remaining number display image NP of the initial number-of-games determination game is targeted, but other remaining number of displays, for example, display of the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state or so-called additional special zone It is also possible to display the number of remaining games. Since the ART gaming state continues from several tens of games to several hundreds of games, the relatively small number of remaining games can be 10 games or less or 5 games or less. Or when the number of ART games is 50 games, about half of the 25 games can be made a relatively small number of games. Similarly, when the additional specialization zone is 10 games, half of the 5 games can be made a relatively small number of games.

[Recover from power interruption while displaying the number of games added in units]
During the progress of the initial game number determination game, by winning an extra lottery, the unit extra game number is added, and as shown in FIG. 105 (b), the unit extra game number is displayed large in the center of the image display body 500. The After the number of units added game is displayed, the initial game number determination game is continuously executed, and the number of units added game is added by winning the addition lottery again.

  The flow of the initial game number determination game will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Here, an example will be described in which a unit number of 10 games is added first, then 10 games, and then 50 games. In the case of adding the first 10 game unit addition games, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), a decoration character “+10” representing the unit addition game number is displayed at the center of the image display body 500. Subsequently, a decoration character “Total + 10” representing the total number of initial games is displayed small on the upper left portion of the image display body 500.

  Next, when the winning lottery is selected, a large “+10” decorative character is displayed at the center of the image display body 500, as shown in FIG. 121 (b). Next, a decorative character of “+10” representing 10 games obtained in this extra lottery is displayed next to the decorative character of “Total + 10” representing 10 games, which is the total number of initial games obtained by the previous extra lottery. Is displayed. Then, a decoration character “Total + 20” representing 20 games as the total number of additional games in the initial game number determination game is displayed small in the upper left portion of the image display body 500.

  Then, when the winning lottery is selected, a large “+50” decorative character is displayed at the center of the image display body 500 as shown in FIG. 121 (c). Next, a decoration character of “+50” representing 50 games obtained by the current addition lottery is displayed next to the decoration character of “Total + 20” representing 20 games, which is the total number of initial games obtained by the previous addition lottery. Is displayed. Then, a decoration character “Total + 70” representing 70 games as the total number of additional games in the initial game number determination game is displayed small in the upper left portion of the image display body 500. Thereafter, in the same manner, the number of units added and the number of games added are increased until it is lost in the addition lottery.

  Here, when a power interruption or the like occurs while the number of units added game is displayed on the image display body 500, the image display body 500 is turned off. Thereafter, when the cause of power interruption or the like is eliminated and the display of the image display body 500 is restored, an image displayed after that is displayed as a restored image, not an image in which the number of units added game is displayed.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (a), when a power interruption or the like occurs when a large “+10” decorative character is displayed at the center of the image display body 500, the power is restored from the power interruption or the like. In this case, an image in which a small decoration character “Total + 10” is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display body 500 is displayed without displaying this image. In the example shown in FIGS. 121 (b) and 121 (c), when a power interruption or the like occurs when a large “+10” or “+50” decorative character is displayed at the center of the image display body 500, When returning from a power interruption or the like, this image is not displayed, and an image in which small decorative characters “Total + 10 + 10” and “Total + 20 + 50” are displayed on the upper left portion of the image display body 500 is displayed. Alternatively, an image in which small decoration characters “Total + 20” and “Total + 70” are displayed on the upper left portion of the image display 500 can be displayed.

  In this way, in the slot machine 5, the number of unit added games is displayed by the image display body 500, and the player is notified of the number of unit added games that have been won. In addition, after displaying the number of units added game, the total number of initial game number determination games is displayed. Here, when the unit addition game number is displayed, a power interruption or the like occurs, and when the cause of the power interruption or the like is eliminated and the unit addition game number is displayed again, the displayed unit addition game number is again It is difficult to determine whether the displayed game is a newly displayed game, and the player may misunderstand the total number of initial games.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 5, when the cause of the power interruption is eliminated, when the display on the image display body 500 is resumed, the power is interrupted during the display of the unit added game number. The total number of initial games is displayed and the display is resumed, and the overlapping display of the unit added game number is suppressed to assist the player in understanding the added game number. Therefore, misunderstanding of the player when displaying the total number of initial games can be suppressed.

  By the way, when displaying the number of games by adding a large unit at the center of the image display body 500, a large display may be made while enlarging a small number. At this time, for example, even when a power interruption occurs while enlarging a small number displayed on the image display body 500, when returning from the power interruption, the total number of initial games is displayed. Can do. In addition, when displaying the number of games with a large unit addition in the center of the image display 500, even when a large number is displayed as it is, the total number of initial games can be displayed when returning from a power interruption or the like. it can.

  In addition, although the example in the case where a power interruption or the like occurs when the unit additional game number is displayed in the initial game number determination game is described here, the same applies to the case where a power interruption or the like occurs in other situations Can be processed. For example, when an additional number of games occurs in the ART gaming state, especially when the additional number of games is added in an additional special zone or the like, the number of additional games is displayed by performing the same processing. The misunderstanding of the player in the case can be suppressed.

[Initial game number determination Recovery from power interruption while displaying game end image]
When the initial game number determination game ends, an initial game number determination game end image is displayed as shown in FIG. 107A, and the player can recognize the end of the initial game number determination game. As the initial game number determination game is continued, the initial game number in the ART gaming state is added, so that the player generally wants the initial game number determination game to continue. For this reason, when the initial game number determination game end image is displayed, the player may feel a little disappointed. The initial game number determination game end image corresponds to profit grant state end information described in the solving means.

  Here, when a power interruption occurs while the initial game number determination game end image is displayed and the screen of the image display body 500 is turned off, the displayed initial game number determination game end image is turned off. . Subsequently, when the power interruption or the like is resolved and the screen of the image display body 500 is displayed again, when the initial game number determination game end image is displayed again, the player confirms that the initial game number determination game ends. It may be re-recognized and may cause disgust to the player.

  In this regard, in the slot machine 5 described above, the power interruption or the like is resolved after the power interruption occurs while the initial game number determination game end image is displayed and the image of the image display body 500 is turned off. When the image display 500 is displayed again, the ART initial game number display image shown in FIG. 107B is displayed without displaying the initial game number determination game end image. The ART initial number-of-games display image corresponds to the profit granting state non-end information described in the solving means. The image display body 500, the effect control board 510 that controls the image display body 500, and the main board 409 correspond to an end display means, an end information recovery display means, and a buffer display means described in the solving means.

  As described above, when the initial game number determination game end image is displayed, a power interruption or the like occurs, and when the power interruption or the like is resolved, the image display body 500 again displays the initial game number determination game end image. Instead, an ART initial game number display image is displayed. For this reason, the player does not need to see the initial game number determination game end image after the interruption of power, etc., so the disgust feeling given to the player is reduced, the feeling of loneliness is reduced, and the decrease in interest is suppressed. be able to.

  In this example, the ART initial game number display image is displayed after the power interruption or the like is completed, but other images different from the initial game number determination game end image can also be displayed. In the above example, the case of power interruption or the like when the initial game number determination game end image is displayed has been described, but similar processing can be performed in other cases. For example, when a power interruption occurs when an ART gaming state end image indicating that the ART gaming state is ended or an additional special zone end image indicating that the additional special zone is ended is displayed. If no power interruption or the like occurs, an image displayed next can be displayed instead of an image.

  The above is one form of the slot machine, but is not limited to this. For example, in the slot machine 3 described above, the lottery between the main bonus and the pseudo bonus is executed independently, but the winning ratio of the main bonus and the pseudo bonus is adjusted to adjust the winning probability of the pseudo bonus or the main bonus. It is also possible to provide a bonus probability adjusting means. For example, when the design value of the winning probability of this bonus is fixed, and the actual value of the winning probability or winning probability of this bonus is not equal to or greater than a certain probability threshold, the transition to the pseudo bonus The probability can be increased. Specifically, for example, when the design value of the winning probability of the bonus is 1/300 and the actual value of the winning probability or winning probability of the bonus is 1/1000 or less, the bonus is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. Or the probability of transition to a pseudo bonus can be increased. Thus, by adjusting the probability of transition to the bonus (advantageous gaming state), it is possible to suitably suppress the transition to the bonus.

  At this time, as the difference between the design value of the winning probability of the bonus and the actual value of the winning probability, or the actual value of the winning probability is larger, the transition probability to the pseudo bonus can be increased. In this case, the sum of the actual value of the transition probability to the real bonus or the pseudo bonus can be brought close to the sum of the design value of the transition probability to the real bonus or the pseudo bonus. Can be converged to the design value and can function as a probability convergence means.

  Furthermore, the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus can be made higher than the winning probability (transition probability) of the bonus. Generally, in the case of this bonus, since the player can be given a greater sense of executing the bonus, the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus is higher than the winning probability (transition probability) of this bonus. By doing so, the satisfaction given to the player can be increased.

  In order to make the winning probability (transition probability) of this bonus higher than the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus, the winning probability (transition probability) of the bonus is adjusted by adjusting the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus. Can be lower. Or, conversely, the winning probability (transition probability) of the bonus can be adjusted to be higher than the winning probability (transition probability) of the pseudo bonus.

  Further, in the slot machine 3 described above, a procedure for executing one piece is taught as a procedure for displaying a bonus symbol combination in a manner in which the benefit obtained for the multiplier is the best. On the other hand, it is also possible to execute a teaching that suggests a single sheet. It is also possible to leave several game intervals before executing the teaching of one sheet. In this case, the player can be given a sense of expectation as to whether or not the bonus has been won.

  Furthermore, the number of times of playing a game with one piece is counted when teaching one piece, and when the number of games according to the teaching exceeds a predetermined number, or the number of times of execution of teaching with respect to the number of teachings When the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of exaltation. By executing such an effect that gives an uplifting feeling, it is possible to prompt the player to execute the effect according to the teaching.

  Alternatively, it is possible to execute an effect according to the number of games according to the teaching or the proportion of execution of the teaching. For example, a player who executes a game with one game every time there is a single game instruction is considered to be a player who has been playing a game in the slot machine 3 for a long period or frequently, so he appreciates the execution of the game. The effect shown can be executed. On the other hand, a player who does not often execute a single-game game according to the teaching can execute an effect that teaches that the game is slightly damaged.

  Further, in the slot machine 3 described above, the appearance rate of freeze control is constant regardless of the situation, but the appearance probability of freeze control can also be adjusted. At this time, as the appearance probability of the freeze control, the appearance probability of the freeze control can be lowered as the appearance record of the freeze control increases. If freeze control is executed many times, the operation acceptance suspension period due to freeze control becomes longer, which may hinder smooth progress of the game. At this time, the more the number of freeze control appearances, the lower the occurrence probability of the freeze control, thereby facilitating the smooth control of the game and the game progress smoothing means.

  Furthermore, when the appearance probability of the freeze is adjusted, the probability that the freeze probability returns to the original can be the same regardless of the probability of the freeze. For example, it is possible to execute a game while maintaining a sense of tension by making the freeze probability return to the original value between 10 relatively short games.

  Also, in the slot machine 5, if the ART transfer lottery is won during the RB, the game shifts to the ART game state, and if the ART transfer lottery is not won before the remaining number of games becomes 0, the game shifts to the ART game state. First, it shifts to the general gaming state. Here, although the winning probability of the ART transfer lottery varies for each gaming state, it is uniform in the general state, during BB, and during RB. On the other hand, it is also possible to provide means for changing the winning probability of the ART transfer lottery during RB or BB, for example, increasing the winning probability of the ART transfer lottery as the final game in RB is approached. In this case, the winning probability of the ART transfer lottery can be increased every time one RB game is consumed, or the winning probability of the ART transfer lottery can be increased from an appropriate game, for example, the remaining 10 games.

  Alternatively, instead of carrying over the remaining number of games in the RB to the ART gaming state, the probability of transition to the ART gaming state can be increased. In this case, although the probability of shifting to the ART gaming state increases, the number of continuing games in the shifted ART gaming state decreases. In this sense, it is possible to maintain a balance with respect to increase / decrease in game media regardless of the mode. Further, when viewed from the player side, even if the number of continuous games is small, it is possible to give an interest in shifting to the ART gaming state.

  Further, it is possible to provide a selection means for the player to select whether to carry over the remaining number of games in the RB to the ART gaming state or to increase the probability of transition to the ART gaming state instead. By providing such a selection means, it becomes possible to advance the game with a game property according to the player's preference.

  Also, instead of carrying over the remaining number of games in the RB to the ART gaming state, it is possible to provide a carry-over game number increasing means for increasing the number of games carried over when the ART transfer lottery is won. If the number of carry-over games is small, for example a few games, even if the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state increases, the amount of increase is very small, and the joy given to the player is reduced. In this regard, by providing means for increasing the number of carry-over games, the player can be greatly satisfied. As a mode of increasing the number of games, for example, a predetermined number of games can be sequentially added, or a so-called double game in which the number of games is increased every time the number of games is increased.

  Furthermore, in the slot machine 5 described above, as a privilege given by displaying a star-like misplay symbol combination or the like four times, a small role that is a privilege given when a star-like replay symbol combination or the like is displayed Although a probability variation game is given, it can be set as the aspect by which another privilege is provided. In this case, the privilege given when the star-like misplay symbol combination or the like is displayed four times may be larger than the privilege given when the star-like replay symbol combination or the like is displayed. it can. In this case, the player's disappointment due to the fact that the star-matched replay symbol combination or the like is not displayed can be further reduced. In addition, the privilege given when the star-like misplay symbol combination or the like is displayed four times can be made smaller than the privilege given when the star-like replay symbol combination or the like is displayed. . In this case, since the reduction in disappointment that the star-matched replay symbol combination or the like has not been displayed is reduced, the star-like replay symbol combination or the like is displayed, so that the expectation of a star can be further increased.

  Further, the image display 500 is instructed to display a star-matched replay. In other instructions, for example, in a game executed on the image display 500 regardless of the stop of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. A command or the like can also be instructed. In addition, a bonus is given when a star-like misreplay symbol combination is displayed four times, but a privilege can also be granted by displaying the number of other times, or a trigger such as a star-like misreplay symbol combination is displayed. If a lottery is carried out and a lottery is won, a privilege can be given. In addition, the lottery can be performed when the number of display times of the misreplay symbol combination or the like with the star alignment reaches a predetermined number.

  Furthermore, instead of setting a plurality of symbol combinations as a star-miscible replay symbol combination and giving a privilege depending on the number of times the star-miscible replay symbol combination is displayed, the display mode of the star-miscible replay symbol combination is displayed. It is also possible to memorize points accordingly and to give a privilege when the stored points reach a predetermined number. For example, after a star symbol is displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 301c and the middle reel 301b, a symbol combination in which a star symbol is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 301a is a misreplay symbol combination of strong stars, the right reel 301c and the middle reel 301b. After the star symbol is displayed in the middle row, the symbol combination in which the star symbol is displayed in the lower row of the left reel 301a is the middle star aligned misreplay symbol combination, and the star symbol is displayed in the middle row of the right reel 301c and the middle reel 301b. Thereafter, a symbol combination in which symbols other than the star symbol are displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel 301a can be a misreplay symbol combination with a weak star alignment. And if a strong star-matched misreplay symbol combination is displayed, +3 points, if a mid-star matching misreplay symbol combination is displayed, +2 points, if a weak star-matched misreplay symbol combination is displayed +1 point can be added to each other, and a bonus can be granted when the total reaches 10 points.

  Alternatively, it is also possible to set various patterns as misreplay symbol combinations that match the stars, and to add points according to these patterns. For example, as a premise, a reel with a plurality of star symbols is set, and a strong star-matched replay symbol in which “star symbol”-“star symbol”-“star symbol” is displayed on three lines as a star-matched replay symbol combination. Combined, replay symbol combination with "star symbol"-"star symbol"-"star symbol" displayed on 2 lines, "star symbol"-"star symbol"-"star symbol" displayed on 1 line A replay symbol combination with a weak star is provided. Among these, it is assumed that the privilege increases in the order of strong star-matched replay symbol combination, middle star-matched replay symbol combination, and weak star-matched replay symbol combination. At this time, when the right reel 301c and the middle reel 301b are stopped, “rotating”-“star symbol”-“star symbol” is displayed on the three lines (hereinafter referred to as “temple display”). When a star-like misreplay symbol combination is displayed, it is +3 points. When a star-matched misreplay symbol combination is displayed, it is +2 points when a star-like misreplay symbol combination is displayed. When a star-like misreplay symbol combination is displayed, +1 point may be used. By doing so, the expectation given to the player by the tempei display changes, and the magnitude of disappointment that the expectation was not satisfied changes, but the greater the privilege that was not obtained, the more disappointment Can be greatly reduced.

  Further, in the slot machine 5, when the extra game continuation lottery is executed, if the extra lottery is won in the extra game, the unit extra game number is added as it is when the extra lottery is won, and the next extra game is added. Transition. On the other hand, for example, when an extra lottery is won at a stage where the number of times of the extra game effect button 800 is few, delay means for delaying the announcement of the extra lottery can be provided. For example, in the case where the winning lottery is won by pressing the effect button 800 for the first time, the winning notification of the winning lottery can be delayed by pressing the effect button 800 for the fourth time or the fifth time. By delaying the announcement of the winning of the extra lottery, attention to the winning of the extra lottery can be increased.

  Further, in the case where the delay means is provided, when the announcement of the extra lottery is delayed, an additional extra lottery that is an additional extra lottery can be performed at the delay time. For example, when the presentation button 800 is pressed for the first time, 10 games are added by winning the lottery, and when the announcement of the lottery is delayed by delay means, the additional lottery is won and 10 games are added. Depending on the case, the number of added games can be 20 games.

  At this time, the number of additional games determined by the additional extra lottery can be the same as the number of additional games determined by the extra lottery. In this case, the player can be made to recognize that a large number of additional games have been added by one extra lottery, so that the player can be given a sense of superiority. Conversely, the number of additional games determined by the additional extra lottery may be a number of games different from the additional game number determined by the extra lottery. In this case, the player recognizes that the additional lottery is being executed, so even if, for example, an indication that there is no extra lottery due to the extra lottery, there is a possibility that the player may actually win the extra lottery. Can be recognized.

  Further, in the slot machine 5, the extra lottery based on the number of times the effect button 800 is pressed is executed by the initial game number determination game, but in other cases, for example, it can be executed in the extra lottery in the ART gaming state.

  Further, in the slot machine 5, in the initial game number determination game, the number of loops is large, for example, when the number of loops is any number from 10 to 15, or when the number of loops is more than that. It is also possible to provide notifying means for executing or adding the lottery and teaching or suggesting the continuation probability of the added game that has changed from a high assumed interest to a low assumed interest. In this way, the continuation probability of the additional game that has become a low-presumed concern is clearly or implicitly notified to the player, and in the subsequent additional games, the number of unit additional games that are high-predicted interests Consciousness can be concentrated on the announcement, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, when the number of loops increases, teaching or suggesting that the continuation probability of the extra game is low, for example, even if it is 50%, the continuation probability of the extra game is high, for example, 80% to 90%. You can also. When the number of loops increases, it can be easily considered that the continuation probability is high regardless of the actual continuation probability of the added game. For this reason, even if the actual continuation probability is low, teaching or suggesting that the continuation probability is high makes it possible to concentrate the consciousness on the announcement of the number of units added, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, as the number of loops increases, it is considered that the tension when pressing the effect button 800 decreases. For this reason, it is also possible to provide a tension imparting means for adjusting the continuation probability and the number of added games and imparting a tension. When adjusting the continuation probability and the unit added game number, the fairness of the game can be ensured by making an adjustment such that the expected value of the final added game number is constant. For example, when the average value of the unit additional games is 10 games and the continuation probability of the additional game is 90%, the average value of the unit additional games is 90 games and the continuation probability of the additional game is 50%. it can. In this case, the expected value of the additional number of games is 90 games regardless of which mode is determined. Furthermore, the player can select a mode in which the continuation probability of the added game with a low average value of the unit added games is high and a mode in which the continuation probability of the added game with a large average value of the unit added games is low. It is also possible to provide selection means.

  In addition, in the slot machine 5, the display of the cherry symbol combination displayed by the symbol conversion control is included as a part of the termination condition of the ART interruption game, but it can be easily replaced with or in addition to this. An operation mode, for example, a display of a symbol combination displayed by executing an operation according to push order navigation, can be a part of the termination condition of the ART interruption game.

  In addition, the ART interruption control transition condition is determined to be the ART interruption control execution lottery. However, the ART interruption control execution is performed under the condition that the end condition of the ART interruption game is easily established, for example, during a small role probability change game. It is also possible to adopt an aspect that makes it easy to win a lottery. In this case, the continuation of the ART interruption game for a long time can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, such as a pachinko machine or a gaming machine (so-called parrot) obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

1, 3, 5 Slot machine 10 Clearance 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer main body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Heat radiation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection Step 107 Attaching piece 108 Attaching piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharge device 110a Device body 110b Hopper 110c Discharge port 110d Overflow rod 110e Dispensing sensor 111 Auxiliary storage box 111a for game medals Medal full sensor 112 Power supply device 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Rear Face plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg portion 112i Vent space 112j Stepped portion 112k Mounting piece 112m Projection portion 112m-1 Protrusion piece 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 1 12s board 112t setting key switch 112u reset switch 112v power switch 113 wiring relay member 114 boss hole 115 rail member 116 rail member 117 stopper 118 mounting tool 119 main body side wirings 120 mounting plate 121 cover body 122 connector board 123 connector board 124 connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Support tube 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent hole 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation unit 203 Medal insertion port 205 Single sheet insertion button 206 MAX insertion Button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Reel stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal cage 213 Return basket 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflective member 218 Fixing member 219 Groove 300 Pattern variation display device 301a Left reel 301b Middle reel 301c Right reel 302 Device case 303 Driving means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate portion 305 Top plate portion 306 Right plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel substrate 313 Cable 315 Detachment portion 316 Handles 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Pattern display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 鍔 416 Hook portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hinge bracket 420a Fixing member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Superposition region 420h Superposition region 420h Superposition region 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle port 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 4 7 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through hole 431 Mounting piece 432 Button-shaped panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Nail piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main substrate 500 Image display body 500s Dashed area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Illuminating device 503 Substrate 505 Translucent cover plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving unit 509 Engaging unit 510 Production control substrate 512 Speaker 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start Ramp 610 Ramp 614 Ramp 623a Right-down line 623b Right-up line 623x Effective line 700 Connector 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hooking wall 703 Stopping shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Picking piece 800 Production button 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM
1116 I / O interface 1130 I / O interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that executes a lottery of a winning combination to rotate a plurality of movable bodies, stops the plurality of rotating movable bodies, and displays a result of the lottery,
A profit granting state control means for controlling a profit granting state in which a profit is given to the player;
An end display means for displaying profit granting state end information indicating the end of the profit granting state when controlled to the profit granting state by the profit granting state control means;
When a game progress interruption situation occurs in which the display by the end display means is interrupted, an end information recovery display means for restarting the display by the end display means when the game progress interruption situation is resolved,
When the game progress interruption situation occurs when the profit grant state end information is displayed by the end display means, and the game progress interruption situation is resolved, the profit grant state end information is displayed by the end information recovery display means. Buffer display means that can relieve the feeling of loneliness due to the end of the profit granting state by displaying information other than the end of the profit granting state and restarting the display by the end display means,
A gaming machine comprising: